Sony Pcs 1 1P Users Manual 1/1P

PCS-11P to the manual c6090ff1-d580-451e-a895-687cd898b0ad

2015-01-23

: Sony Sony-Pcs-1-1P-Users-Manual-298816 sony-pcs-1-1p-users-manual-298816 sony pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 240

DownloadSony Sony-Pcs-1-1P-Users-Manual- PCS-1/1P  Sony-pcs-1-1p-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
3-207-456-16 (1)

Video
Communication
System
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for
future reference.

PCS-1/1P
© 2003 Sony Corporation

Owner’s Record
The model and the serial numbers are
located at the bottom. Record the serial
number in the space provided below. Refer
to these numbers whenever you call upon
your Sony dealer regarding this product.
Model No. PCS-1/1P
Serial No. ______________

WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
not expose the unit to rain or
moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing to
qualified personnel only.
WARNING
This unit has no power switch.
When installing the unit, incorporate a
readily accessible disconnect device in the
fixed wiring, or connect the power cord to
socket-outlet which must be provided near
the unit and easily accessible.
If a fault should occur during operation of
the unit, operate the disconnect device to
switch the power supply off, or disconnect
the power cord.
IMPORTANT
The nameplate is located on the bottom.
For the customers in the USA
WARNING
Using this unit at a voltage other than 120 V
may require the use of a different line cord or
attachment plug, or both. To reduce the risk
of fire or electric shock, refer servicing to
qualified service personnel.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.

2

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
The shielded interface cable recommended
in this manual must be used with this
equipment in order to comply with the limits
for a computing device pursuant to Subpart
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
This manual focuses on using ISDN lines
to conduct a videoconference, but it also
covers non-ISDN lines. If you use ISDN
lines, consult your Sony dealer for more
information.
• The ISDN service may not be available
in some areas.
Voor de klanten in Nederland
Dit apparaat bevat een vast ingebouwde
batterij die niet vervangen hoeft te worden
tijdens de levensduur van het apparaat.
Raadpleeg uw leverancier indien de batterij
toch vervangen moet worden.
De batterij mag alleen vervangen worden
door vakbekwaam servicepersoneel.

Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in
als klein chemisch afval (KCA).
Lever het apparaat aan het einde van de
levensduur in voor recycling, de batterij zal
dan op correcte wijze verwerkt worden.

If you dispose the unit, consult your nearest
Sony Service Center. The built-in battery
must be treated as a chemical waste.
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.

3

Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Installation and
Preparation
Using This Manual ............................. 9
Features ............................................ 10
System Components ........................ 12
Basic System Components ......... 12
Optional Equipment ................... 13
System Configuration ...................... 15
System Configuration via a
LAN ................................ 15
System Configuration via an
ISDN ............................... 16
System Configuration via a LAN for
Multipoint Conference .... 17
System Configuration via an ISDN
for Multipoint
Conference ...................... 18
System Configuration via a LAN
and ISDN for Multipoint
Conference ...................... 19
System Configuration via a LAN for
Multipoint Data
Conference ...................... 20
System Configuration via an ISDN
for Multipoint Data
Conference ...................... 21
System Connections ......................... 22
System Connection via a LAN ... 22
System Connection via an ISDN 23
Preparing the System ....................... 24
Inserting Batteries into the Remote
Commander ..................... 24
Turning On/Off the TV Monitor
Together With the
Communication Terminal 25
Turning the System On/Off ............. 26
Turning On ................................. 26
Standby Mode Function ............. 27
Setting the Video Communication
System to Standby Mode 28

4

Adjusting the Volume on the TV
Monitor ............................29
Turning Off .................................29
Displaying the Versions and
Options ............................30
Displaying the Help ....................30
Setting Up the System for the First Time
— Initial Setup Wizard .....................31
Using the Menu ................................34
Operation ....................................34
Menu Configurations ..................35
Entering Characters ....................38

Chapter 2: Registration and
Setup for System
Administrators
Registering Local Information .........39
Opening the Setup Menu for the
Administrator ...................39
Dial Setup Menu .........................40
Answer Setup Menu ...................43
General Setup Menu ...................45
Audio Setup Menu ......................48
LAN Setup Menu ........................50
Administrator Setup Menu .........53
ISDN Setup Menu .......................54
SPID Setting for Customers in the
USA and Canada .............56
Multipoint Setup Menu ...............57
Machine Information Menu ........59
Status Menu ................................60
Encryption via LAN Menu .........61
SIP Setup Menu ..........................62
Registering a Remote Party – Phone
Book ................................................63
Registering a New Remote Party 63
Changing the Contents of the Phone
Book ................................65

Copying the Setting of the Phone
Book Menu ......................66
Deleting the Registered Remote
Party ................................66
Creating a Private Phone Book ..66

Chapter 3: Daily
Videoconference
Starting a Conference by Calling a
Remote Party ....................................69
Turning on the Power .................69
Using the Launcher Menu ..........70
Selecting the Video/Audio Quality
Mode ...............................73
Calling a Remote Party ...............74
Receiving a Call from a Remote
Party ...............................................82
Answering a Call from a Remote
Party ................................82
Ending the Conference ...............84
Adjusting the Sound .........................85
Adjusting the Volume ................85
Cutting Off the Sound Momentarily
– Muting Function ...........85
Synchronizing Audio and Video –
Lip Sync Function ...........86
Reducing Echo – Echo Canceler 86
Cutting Off the Sound On
Answering – Mic on Answer
Function ..........................86
Adjusting the Camera .......................87
Selecting the Camera to be
Controlled .......................87
Adjusting the Camera Angle and
Zoom ...............................88
Adjusting the Focus and
Brightness .......................90
Presetting the Angle and Zoom
Settings ............................91
Recalling the Preset Angle and
Zoom Setting ...................93
Selecting the Input Picture and
Sound ...............................................95
Switching the Displayed Picture

Between the Local and
Remote Pictures .............. 95
Selecting the Input Picture ......... 95
Switching the Sound to Be Sent to
the Remote Party ............ 97
Switching the Picture Displayed on
the TV Monitor ............... 97
Monitoring the Local Picture as a
Window Picture – PinP Feature ...... 98

Chapter 4: Videoconference
With Optional Equipment
Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory
Stick” for a Videoconference .......... 99
Displaying a Still Image Stored in a
“Memory Stick” .............. 99
Sending a Still Image Stored in a
“Memory Stick” ............ 102
About a “Memory Stick” ............... 104
Formatting a “Memory Stick” . 105
Sending Motion Pictures as Still
Images ............................................ 106
Sending Still Images Using the Still
Image Menu .................. 106
Sending a Still Image Using the
Communication
Submenu ....................... 107
Sending Motion Pictures Output
from a Document Stand as
Still Images ................... 108
Sending Motion Pictures Input from
an External Camera or Other
Equipment as Still
Images ........................... 109
Receiving Still Images from a Remote
Party ............................................. 110
Saving Still Images to a “Memory
Stick” ............................................. 111
Saving Still Images Using the Still
Image Menu .................. 111
Saving Still Images Using the
Memory Stick Menu ..... 112

5

Saving Still Images Using the
Communication
Submenu ....................... 113
Using a Convenient Menu Available
during Communication —
Communication Submenu .............. 114
Using Two Monitors – Dual
Monitor .......................................... 115
Switching the Picture Displayed on
Dual Monitors ............... 117
Using Multiple Microphones ......... 118
Using the Communication Transducer
(CTE) ............................................. 120
Recording Audio During a
Conference ..................................... 122
Sending Audio/Video from the External
Equipment to a Remote Party ........ 123
Outputting Video Signals to External
Equipment ...................................... 125
Conducting a Conference Without the
Picture – Voice Meeting ................ 126
Controlling the Remote System With
the Tone Signal – DTMF
Transmission .................................. 127
Conducting a Data Conference Using
NetMeeting – T.120 Data
Conference ..................................... 128
Accessing the Communication
Terminal ......................................... 131
Using a Web Browser .............. 131
Using Telnet ............................. 131

Chapter 5: Data Conference
Connection Example Using the Data
Solution Box .................................. 133
To connect the CTE-600
Communication
Transducer .................... 135
Using Audio/Video Signal from the
Connected Equipment for a
Conference ..................................... 136
Setting Before Conferencing .... 136

6

Operating the System During a
Conference .....................136
Displaying the Picture on a Projector or
Monitor ...........................................142
Outputting the Signal to One
Monitor ..........................142
Outputting the Signal to Two
Monitors ........................143

Chapter 6: Videoconference
Using a Whiteboard
Connection Example With a
Whiteboard .....................................145
Attaching the mimio Xi on the
Whiteboard .....................................146
Conducting a Videoconference Using a
Whiteboard .....................................147

Chapter 7: Encrypted
Videoconference via LAN
Preparing for an Encrypted
Videoconference via LAN ..............151
Starting an Encrypted Videoconference
via LAN ..........................................152

Chapter 8: Multipoint
Videoconference
Connection Examples for a Multipoint
Videoconference .............................154
Using the LAN Connection (Up to 6
Points) ............................154
Using the Cascade Connection via
LAN (Up to 10 Points) ..155
Using the ISDN Connection .....156
Using the LAN and ISDN
connections ....................158
Using the LAN and ISDN cascade
connection .....................159
Preparing for a multipoint
videoconference ..............................160

Installing the MCU software .... 160
Setting for a Multipoint
Videoconference ........... 162
Registering the Remote Parties in
the Multipoint Connection
List ................................164
Starting a Multipoint
Videoconference ............................168
Calling Remote Parties ............. 168
Receiving a Call from a Remote
Party .............................. 172
Using the Display Control ..............173
What is “Broadcast Mode”? ..... 173
Broadcast Modes and Displayed
Windows ....................... 175
Switching the Broadcast Mode . 176
Receiving the Broadcast Requested
From Any Other
Terminal ........................ 177
Ending the Multipoint
Videoconference ............................178
Notes on Secondary Terminals ...... 179
Connecting the External MCU .......180
Activating the Chair Control .... 180
Multipoint Attribute .......................183

Chapter 9: Videoconference
Using SIP
Connection Examples for a
Videoconference Using SIP ...........186
Connection Example for Point-toPoint Videoconference .. 186
Connection Examples for
Multipoint
Videoconference ........... 187
Preparing for a Videoconference Using
SIP
.............................................189
Installing the SIP Software ....... 189
Setting for SIP ..........................190
Registering Remote Parties in the
Phone Book ................... 192
Starting a Videoconference Using
SIP
.............................................193

Calling Remote Parties ............ 193
Ending a Videoconference ....... 195
Receiving a Call from a Remote
Party .............................. 195

Appendix
Location and Function of Parts and
Controls ......................................... 196
PCS-P1/P1P Communication
Terminal ....................... 196
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit ....... 197
PCS-R1 Remote Commander .. 198
PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
(Optional) ..................... 200
PCS-B384 ISDN Unit
(Optional) ..................... 200
PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box
(Optional) ..................... 201
On Screen Messages ...................... 202
Troubleshooting ............................. 212
Specifications ................................ 216
PCS-P1/P1P Communication
Terminal ....................... 216
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit ....... 217
PCS-R1 Remote Commander .. 217
PCS-AC195 AC Adaptor ......... 217
PCS-A1 Microphone
(Optional) ..................... 217
PCS-B384 ISDN Unit
(Optional) ..................... 218
PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
(Optional) ..................... 218
PCS-A300 Microphone
(Optional) ..................... 218
PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box
(Optional) ..................... 218
PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU Software
(Optional) ..................... 218
PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU Software
(Optional) ..................... 218
Acceptable RGB Input/Output
Signals .......................... 219
Pin Assignment ........................ 221

7

Pin Assignment on Optional Board
Connectors .................... 223
List of Port Numbers Used on the
PCS-1/1P ....................... 224
Videoconferencing Room Layout .. 226
Camera Range .......................... 226
Installing the Communication
Terminal and Camera .... 227
Glossary ......................................... 228
Menu Configuration ..................... 231

8

Using This Manual
The chapters cover the following contents;
please read the chapters that may be required
for your type of videoconference.
Chapter 1: Installation and
Preparation
This chapter guides you through the system
configuration and information required to
use your Video Communication System for
the first time. It shows you how to install and
connect your Video Communication
System, to turn the system on/off and how to
access basic on-screen menus.
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for
System Administrator
This chapter describes how to register and
set up all the necessary items for system
administrators, using the on-screen menus.
Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference
This chapter guides you through the basic
operations and settings to conduct a
videoconference. You will learn how to
conduct a conference from start to finish. It
is recommended that this chapter be read by
participants in the videoconference.

* mimio® is a registered trademark of Virtual
Ink Corporation of the United States.
minio Xi is a trademark of Virtual Ink
Corporation of the United States.

Chapter 7: Encrypted
videoconference via LAN
This chapter shows how to conduct a
videoconference using an encrypted video
and audio data, and encrypted data from a
computer connected to the Data Solution
Box.
Chapter 8: Multipoint
Videoconference
This chapter shows you how to use the
Video Communication System to hold a
multipoint videoconference.
You need to install MCU software in this
System for a multipoint videoconference.
Chapter 9: Videoconference Using
SIP
This chapter guides you how to conduct a
videoconference using SIP with an IP phone,
etc. Installing the optional SIP software is
required for a session using SIP.
Appendix
This chapter contains description of the
controls and connectors on the components
of the Video Communication System,
message and troubleshooting lists,
specifications and glossaries.

Chapter 4: Videoconference With
Optional Equipment
This chapter shows advanced
videoconferencing using the optional
equipment.
Chapter 5: Data Conference
This chapter shows you how to use the data
from a computer for the conference by using
the optional Data Solution Box.

Using This Manual

9

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

Chapter 1:
Installation and
Preparation

Chapter 6: Videoconference Using a
Whiteboard
This chapter shows how to use a whiteboard
with the mimio Xi* attached for a
videoconference.

Features

Wide range of video/audio
compression format selectable

The PCS-1/1P Video Communication
System is a videoconferencing system that
provides natural, face-to-face
communications with a remote party by
transmitting and receiving images and sound
via LAN (Local Area Network) or ISDN
(Integrated Services Digital Network)
connections.

The Video Communication System supports
Interlaced SIF, H.264, MPEG4, H.263+,
H.263 and H.261 for video compression
format, and MPEG4 Audio, G.722.1,
G.722, G.729, G.728, G.723.1, G.711 for
audio compression format. You can choose
whether priority is given to video or audio
depending on the type of conference or
video/audio equipment used by a remote
party.

Supports ITU-T international
videoconferencing standard
The Video Communication System
complies with ITU-T Recommendations
defined by WTSC for easy connection with
remote parties overseas.
ITU: International Telecommunication
Union
WTSC: World Telecommunications
Standardization Committee

QoS (Quality of Service) function
for optimization of bandwidth and
traffic packet through network
“Packet Resend Request” and “Adaptive
Rate Control” functions incorporated,
allowing solution for busy network traffic or
packet loss, which provides consistent highquality communication.

Easy setup and operation
Supports data conferences
Use of the optional PCS-DSB1 Data
Solution Box allows the data from a personal
computer to be incorporated in the
presentation or to be shown on the projector.

Versatile use with a variety of
display units

The Help menu appears on the monitor
screen for guidance of operation. The menus
used for the system administrator or those
for conference participants are separately
displayed.

Supports multipoint conference

The Video Communication System is
compact size, allowing easy installation on a
TV. The camera and the Communication
Terminal can be separately installed,
allowing for greater flexibility when using a
large-size plasma display, projector screen,
etc.

Installing the optional PCS-323M1 H.323
MCU software (for LAN) or the PCS320M1 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN)
allows conduct of a multipoint conference.
The multipoint conference via LAN and
ISDN connections mixed is also available if
both the PCS-323M1 H.323 and PCS320M1 H.320 MCU software are installed in
a main Terminal.

High transmission speeds and
high-quality picture capability

Memory Stick slot equipped

The Video Communication System accepts
a LAN bandwidth of up to 1920 Kbps. It also
allows connection to as many as three ISDN
lines; 6B channels usable by using the
optional PCS-B384 ISDN Unit and as many
as six ISDN lines; 12B channels usable by
using the optional PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.

10

Features

The Communication Terminal is equipped
with a Memory Stick slot, allowing the use
of still images recorded with a digital still
camera and stored in the “Memory Stick”.

Dual monitor system
Two monitors can be connected to the
Communication Terminal, enabling the use

of one monitor for motion pictures, and the
other monitor for pictures from a computer
or still images.

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

Supports an encrypted
videoconference (only for LAN
connection)
When you connect to other terminals via
LAN, you can start a videoconference only
with the terminals that enter the preset
password. This feature allows you to hold a
strictly confidential videoconference.
An encrypted conference among multiple
points or with cascade connection is enabled
if all the terminals are connected via LAN.

Supports a conference using SIP
Installing the optional PCSA-SP1 SIP
software allows conduct of a conference
with an IP phone, etc. using SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol).
If you install the optional MCU software as
well as the SIP software, you can conduct a
multipoint conference.

Features

11

System Components
The PCS-1/1P Video Communication System is composed of basic system
components for a basic videoconference, and optional equipment for an
enhanced videoconference.

Basic System Components
The PCS-1/1P Video Communication System is the basic system of the PCS1/1P Videoconferencing System. It contains the following components:

12

Unit

Description

PCS-P1/P1P Communication
Terminal

Contains the video codec, audio codec, echo
canceler, network interfaces and system controller.

PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit

Composed of the camera and an integrated
microphone.

PCS-R1 Remote Commander

Used to operate the Communication Terminal and
Camera Unit.

PCS-AC195 AC adaptor

Supplies power to the Communication Terminal.

System Components

Optional Equipment
TV monitor

Unit

Description

TV, Projector, etc.

Used as a monitor and speakers.

Optional equipment especially designed for use with the PCS-1/1P
The following optional devices are used to enhance your videoconference.
Unit

Description

PCS-B384 ISDN Unit

Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to three ISDN
lines; 6B channels usable.

PCS-B768 ISDN Unit

Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to six ISDN
lines; 12B channels usable.

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box Use of this device allows easy connection with a
computer or projector for a data conference.

PCS-A1 Microphone

Omni-directional microphone that picks up sound
relatively from all directions, allowing participants to
speak from any location. It is recommended to use in
a quiet situation.

PCS-A300 Microphone

Unidirectional microphone. It is recommended when
you want to pick up the voice of a speaker directed
toward the microphone.

System Components

13

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

A TV or projector, etc. is required to monitor the images for videoconferencing
system.

Unit

Description

PCS-DS150/DS150P
Document Stand

Allows transmission of pictures to the
Communication Terminal by infrared signals without
connecting a cable.

CTE-600 Communication
Transducer

Integrated microphone/speaker system suitable for
remote communication. The uni-directional
microphones pick up clear voice with minimum
background noise.
Moreover, the omni-directional speaker outputs
sound equally in all directions.

PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU
Software

Allows use for a multipoint videoconference over
LAN connection.

PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU
Software

Allows use for a multipoint videoconference over
ISDN connection.

PCSA-SP1 SIP Software

Allows conduct of a videoconference using SIP.

Connecting cables
Use the following connecting cables to connect devices in this system.
PCS-1/1P Video Communication System
Cable

Part No.

Number

Camera cable (0.25 m (0.8 feet))

1-827-376-11

1

S-video connecting cable (1.5 m (4.9 feet))

1-776-078-42

1

Audio connecting cable (1 m (3.3 feet))

1-765-258-31

1

Camera cable

S-video connecting cable

Audio connecting cable

14

System Components

System Configuration

System Configuration via a LAN
This allows you:

• To hold a point-to-point videoconference over LAN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
System configuration
1
2
3
4
ON LINE

POWER

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

System Configuration

15

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

The PCS-1/1P Video Communication System has various system
configuration capabilities using the basic components and optional equipment.
This section describes seven typical examples.

System Configuration via an ISDN
Connection to ISDN is required to use the PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
especially designed for use with this system.
This allows you:
• To hold a point-to-point videoconference over ISDN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
• To hold a videoconference with high speeds and highest quality image
transmission by connecting up to three ISDN lines (when using the PCSB384) or by connecting up to six ISDN lines (when using the PCS-B768).
System configuration

*
ON LINE

POWER

1
2
3
4
5

LAN ALERT

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)
PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit (not
supplied)

*

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

*

The illustration shows an example using
the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.

About the number of ISDN lines and B (bearer) channel
Up to three ISDN lines with the PCS-B384 ISDN Unit or up to six ISDN lines with
the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit can be connected to one PCS-1/1P. Each ISDN line is

composed of two B channels that carry data signals on the ISDN interface,
enabling both channels to be used for one ISDN line connection (2B
connection), or each for a separate ISDN line connection (1B connection). The
more channels you use for a single communication, the faster speeds and
higher-quality picture you can obtain for your network communication. You
can connect up to three ISDN lines with the PCS-B384 and select the number
of channels used for a single communication from among 1B (64K), 2B
(128K), 3B (192K), 4B (256K), 5B (320K) and 6B (384K) connections. When
using the PCS-B768, you can connect up to six ISDN lines and select the
number of channels from among 1B (64K), 2B (128K), 3B (192K), 4B (256K),
5B (320K) and 6B (384K), 8B (512K) and 12B (768K) connections.

16

System Configuration

System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint Conference
You need to install the optional PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software.

System configuration

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT
ON LINE

1
2
3
4
5

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)
PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)

System Configuration

17

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

This allows you:
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to ten sites over LAN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
• To show the still images on the second TV monitor or projector.
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to two external
microphones.

System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint Conference
You need to connect the optional PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
especially designed for use with this System and to install the optional PCS320M1 H.320 MCU software.
This allows you:
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to six sites over ISDN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
• To show the still images on the second TV monitor or projector.
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to two external
microphones.
System configuration

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

ON LINE

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

1

2

3

4

5

ON LINE

ON LINE

1
2
3
4
5
6

18

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)
PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)
PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit (not supplied)

System Configuration

POWER

LAN ALERT

6

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

The illustration shows an example
using the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.

System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint
Conference

This allows you:
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to ten sites over LAN and
ISDN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
• To show the still images on the second TV monitor or projector.
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to two external
microphones.
System configuration
LAN*

ON LINE

POWER

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT
ON LINE

1

2

3

4

5

6

ON LINE

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

1

ON LINE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

ON LINE

POWER

2

3

4

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)
PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)
PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)
PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit (not supplied)

5

6

ON LINE

ON LINE

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

* Be sure to make a connection
via LAN.

The illustration shows an
example using the PCS-B768
ISDN Unit.

System Configuration

19

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

Installing the optional PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software (for LAN) and PCS320M1 H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) enables conduct of a multipoint
conference via a LAN and ISDN mixed.
Two Communication Terminals in which MCU software is installed must be
connected via a LAN.

System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint Data Conference
You need to connect the optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box especially
designed to use with this System and to install the optional PCS-323M1 H.323
MCU software.
This allows you:
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to ten sites over LAN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
• To use the data from a computer or external equipment.
• To show the data from a computer or still images on the second TV monitor
or projector.
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to five external
microphones connected to the Data Solution Box.
System configuration

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT
ON LINE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

20

LAN ALERT

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)
PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software (not supplied)
PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box (not supplied)
PCS-A1 Microphone (not supplied)

System Configuration

POWER

ON LINE

System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint Data Conference
You need to connect the optional PCS-384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit and the
PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box especially designed for use with this System
and to install the optional PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software.

System configuration

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

ON LINE

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

1

2

3

4

5

ON LINE

ON LINE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
PCS-R1 Remote Commander
TV monitor (not supplied)
PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software (not supplied)
PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit (not supplied)
PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box (not supplied)
PCS-A1 Microphone (not supplied)

POWER

LAN ALERT

6

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

The illustration shows an example
using the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.

System Configuration

21

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

This allows you:
• To hold a multipoint videoconference among up to six sites over ISDN.
• To show still images stored in a “Memory Stick”.
• To use the data from a computer or an external equipment.
• To show the data from a computer or still images on the second TV monitor
or projector.
• To pick up a large number of participants’ voices using up to five external
microphones connected to the Data Solution Box.

System Connections
This section describes the typical system connections.
Notes

• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.
• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable with the power on. Doing so may damage
the Camera Unit or Communication Terminal.
• For safety, do not connect the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector to a network that
applies an excess voltage via the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector.

System Connection via a LAN
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit

TERMINAL

VISCA OUT

to TERMINAL
Camera cable*

PCS-P1/P1P
Communication
Terminal
AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

to CAMERA UNIT
AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to DC19.5V
to AUDIO
OUT

Audio
connecting
cable*

to VIDEO
OUT
MONITOR
MAIN

S-video
connecting
cable*

Power cord*
to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T

PCS-AC195
AC adaptor

to a wall outlet

UTP cable (category 5, straight)**
to LAN

to S-video
input
TV monitor**

* supplied
** not supplied

22

to audio input

System Connections

to a wall outlet

System Connection via an ISDN
Notes

PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit

TERMINAL

VISCA OUT

to TERMINAL

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

Power cord*

Camera cable*

PCS-P1/P1P
Communication
Terminal
AUDIO OUT

PCS-AC195
AC adaptor

to a wall outlet

to CAMERA UNIT
AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

to AUDIO
OUT

to VIDEO
OUT
MONITOR
MAIN

2

to ISDN
UNIT
ISDN Unit**

Interface cable
(supplied with the ISDN Unit)

Audio
connecting
cable*

to DC19.5V

to
TERMINAL

PCS-B384
1

S-video
connecting
cable*

2

3

PCS-B768
1

2

3

4

5

6

TV monitor**
to S-video
input

to ISDN
1-3

to ISDN 1-6
ISDN modular
cable**

* supplied
** not supplied

to audio input

to a wall outlet

System Connections

23

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable or the interface cable with the power on.
Doing so may damage the Camera Unit, Communication Terminal or ISDN Unit.
• Used with the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit for the first time, the Communication Terminal
may automatically upgrade the software of the ISDN Unit. While the upgrading
message is displayed on the monitor screen, be sure not to turn off the Communication
Terminal. Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.

Preparing the System
Inserting Batteries into the Remote Commander
Most of the operations with the Video Communication System can be
controlled with the supplied Remote Commander.

1

Remove the battery compartment cover.

2

Insert two size AA (R6) batteries (supplied) with correct polarities into the
battery compartment.

Note

Be sure to insert the batteries E side first. Inserting them forcibly e side first may
damage the insulated film covering the batteries and cause a short circuit.

3

Replace the cover.

Battery life
When the Remote Commander does not function properly, replace both the
batteries with new ones.
Notes on batteries
To avoid damage from possible battery leakage or corrosion, observe the
following:
• Make sure to insert the batteries with the polarities in the correct direction.
• Do not mix old and new batteries, or different types of batteries.
• Do not attempt to charge the batteries.
• If you do not intend to use the Remote Commander for a long period of time,
remove the batteries.
• If battery leakage occurs, clean the battery compartment and replace all the
batteries with new ones.

24

Preparing the System

Turning On/Off the TV Monitor Together With the Communication
Terminal

TV monitor

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
IR OUT
1

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

2

WHITE
BOARD

DC 19.5V

DSB

Remote sensor

IR repeater (supplied)
to IR OUT

Note

If the TV monitor is not turned on by pressing the @/1 button on the Remote
Commander, change the “IR Repeater Mode” setting in the General Setup menu.

For details on the “IR Repeater Mode” setting, see “General Setup Menu” on
page 47.

Preparing the System

25

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

If you use a Sony TV, insert the IR repeater under the remote sensor of the TV.
Once you set the IR repeater, the TV will turn on or go to standby together with
the Communication Terminal when you press the "/1 button on the supplied
Remote Commander.

Turning the System On/Off
This section describes how to turn on or off the Communication Terminal.

Turning On

1

Turn on the TV monitor.
If the IR repeater is installed in the TV monitor, set the TV monitor to standby
mode. The TV monitor will turn on simultaneously when the Communication
Terminal is turned on.

2

Turn on the power of any other equipment to be used for the
videoconference.

3

Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
the on position (@).

POWER indicators
(Light in green.)

Power switch

The Communication Terminal turns on after a while. Three indicators on the
front of the Communication Terminal and the POWER indicator on the camera
light, then only the POWER indicators on both units remain on in green. The
launcher menu will appear on the monitor screen and the picture shot by the
local camera will also appear in the launcher menu.

Launcher menu

Connect
Phone Book
Dial

Menu

Angle Adj.

Press to show help

IP:0.0.0.0
Video:Main

26

Turning the System On/Off

ISDN:012345678912
Audio:MIC(INT)+AUX

Notes

For setups using the wizard, see “Setting Up the System for the First Time
— Initial Setup Wizard” on page 31.
• Used with an optional device especially designed for use with this system, such as the
Data Solution Box or ISDN Unit, for the first time, the Communication Terminal may
automatically upgrade the software of the connected device. While the upgrading
message is displayed on the monitor screen, be sure not to turn off the Communication
Terminal. Doing so may cause malfunction of the system. System malfunction may
also occur when a system power-off has been caused by an accidental problem such
as a power interruption during upgrading. If connection of the Data Solution Box or
ISDN Unit to the Communication Terminal is not re-established even after the system
power is recovered, consult a Sony dealer.

Standby Mode Function
To save power the Communication Terminal will enter standby mode if you
do not operate it for a specified period of time.
When the Communication Terminal is in standby mode, the POWER indicator
lights in orange. Once the Communication Terminal receives a call, the
standby mode is automatically released.
To release the standby mode
Press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.
To specify the standby time
Specify the time that you want the system to remain on before entering into
standby mode (1 to 99 minutes) using “Standby Time” in the General Setup
menu. If you do not want the system to enter the standby mode, set “Standby
Mode” in the General Setup menu to “Off”.
For the “Standby Time” and “Standby Mode” settings, see “General Setup
Menu” on page 46.
Notes

• The POWER indicator on the camera goes off when the system enters standby mode.
• If you use a Sony TV monitor with the IR repeater installed under the remote sensor,
the TV monitor will enter standby mode together with the Communication Terminal.

Turning the System On/Off

27

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

• After the power is turned on, the camera moves automatically for trial operation. Be
careful not to catch your finger.
• If you use force to prevent the camera moving, it may not resume moving and not
output a signal to the Communication Terminal. In this case, turn off the Terminal,
and turn it on again.
• When you turn on the power of the Communication Terminal for the first time after
installation, the setup wizard will appear after the self-diagnosis is completed. Set up
your system following the wizard.

Setting the Video Communication System to Standby Mode
You can turn on the Video Communication System with the @/1 button on the
Remote Commander if it is in standby mode.

1

Display the launcher menu on the monitor screen, then press the @/1 button
on the Remote Commander.
The message “Power off?” appears on the monitor screen.

2

Press the B or b button on the Remote Commander to select OK, and press
the PUSH ENTER button.
You may press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.

POWER indicator (Not lit.)

POWER indicator (Lights in orange.)

@/1 button

B/b buttons and PUSH ENTER
button

The Video Communication System enters standby mode and the POWER
indicator on the Communication Terminal lights in orange. The POWER
indicator on the camera goes out.
If the IR repeater is installed in a Sony TV monitor, it will go into standby
together with the Video Communication System.
Note

When the Communication Terminal and the Camera are separately installed, point the
Remote Commander to the Camera for operations.

To cancel setting the system to standby
Select “Cancel” with the B or b button on the Remote Commander, then press
the PUSH ENTER button in step 2 above.

28

Turning the System On/Off

Turning Off
Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
the off position (a).

2

Turn off the power of other equipment used for the videoconference.

Note

Set the power switch on the Communication Terminal off when the system will not be
used for an extended period. While the power switch is off, you cannot receive a call
from a remote party.

Adjusting the Volume on the TV Monitor
Before adjusting the volume on the TV monitor, set the volume on the
Communication Terminal to the appropriate position.

1

Press the VOLUME +/– buttons on the Remote Commander to set the
volume level on the adjustment bar displayed on the screen to the middle
position.

2

Adjust the volume on the TV monitor so that you can properly hear a
remote party speaking.

To adjust the picture on the TV monitor
Use the controls on the TV monitor to adjust the picture, hue, contrast,
brightness or sharpness.
For details on picture adjustments, refer to the Operating Instructions of the
TV.
Note

Do not activate the TV’s surround sound feature as it cause strange sound since the echo
canceler of the Communication Terminal does not function properly.

Turning the System On/Off

29

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

1

Displaying the Help
Pressing the HELP button on the Remote Commander displays a balloon help
or a help screen to guide most operations on the monitor screen.
Note

You can hide the balloon help used for entering characters.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to show the menu, select
“Character Input Help” from the General Setup menu, and select “Off”. (See page 47.)

Displaying the Versions and Options
You can check the version of the Communication Terminal, versions of the
connected optional equipment for exclusive use of this system, and the options
installed in the Terminal by displaying the Machine Information menu on the
monitor screen.
For details on the Machine Information menu, see “Machine Information
Menu” on page 59.

30

Turning the System On/Off

When you turn on the Communication
Terminal for the first time after installation
and the self-diagnosis is completed, the
setup wizard appears on the monitor screen.
Register your local system data with the
setup wizard using the Remote Commander.

3

Select a monitor from which signals
are output.
Note

If you select a monitor from “Monitor
Out”, other monitors than that you
selected display no menus.
Monitor Setup Wizard

Dual Monitor

Off

Monitor Out

VIDEO OUT

Notes

• You can change the settings made with the
setup wizard later using the Setup menus.
• The setup wizard will also be displayed when
you install the PCS-B384 or PCS-B768
ISDN Unit to your system later. Perform the
setup again.

1

Select the language used for the onscreen menus and messages in the
Language Setup Wizard.
Language: Select one of 17 languages;
English, French, German, Japanese,
Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese,
Portuguese, Traditional Chinese,
Korean, Dutch, Swedish, Danish,
Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic.
Language Setup Wizard

Language

English

Next

2

Cancel

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Next”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The Monitor Setup Wizard appears.
Note

Set this item only when you connect two or
more monitors with your System. If you
connect only one monitor TV, select
“Next”, then proceed to step 5.

Previous

Next

Cancel

Dual Monitor: When two monitors are
connected to the System, select
whether you use the dual monitor
mode to allow displaying motion
pictures on one monitor.
On: Enables the dual monitor mode. On
the second monitor still images,
images output from a computer or
captured images from a whiteboard.
Off: Disables the dual monitor mode.
For details on the dual monitor mode,
see see “Using Two Monitors – Dual
Monitor” on page 115.
Monitor Out (or Sub Monitor Out):
Select the output connected to the
monitor to which the signal is output.
This item changes to “Sub Monitor
Out” if “Dual Monitor” is set to “On”,
and selects the output connected to the
sub-monitor (second monitor) to
which the signal is output.
RGB OUT: Outputs from the RGB
OUT connector on the
Communication Terminal.
RGB OUT (DSB): Outputs from the
RGB OUT connector on the Data
Solution Box.
VIDEO OUT: Outputs from the
VIDEO OUT MONITOR MAIN or
SUB connector.
For details, see “Displaying the Picture
on a Projector or Monitor” on page 142.

Setting Up the System for the First Time — Initial Setup Wizard

31

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

Setting Up the
System for the First
Time — Initial Setup
Wizard

4

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Next”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.

Area Code: Enter the area code. Do not
enter the first “0” number.
Local Number: Enter the telephone
number.

The ISDN Setup Wizard appears when
the PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
is connected.
When the ISDN Unit is not connected,
the LAN Setup Wizard is displayed.
Proceed to step 11.

5

When you select Auto SPID (only
for customers in the USA and
Canada)
You can automatically set up the Area
Code and Local Number on this page,
and SPID items in the SPID menu.

Set the following items on the ISDN
line.

Notes

• When you select a blank text box and
press the PUSH ENTER button on the
Remote Commander, the content in the
text box immediately above will be
copied to the selected text box.

ISDN Setup Wizard

Country/Region

USA

Country/Region Code

1

Protocol

National ISDN

Previous

Next

Cancel

Country/Region: Select your country
or region.
Country/Region Code: Enter your
country code or region code with the
number buttons on the Remote
Commander.
Protocol: Select the protocol of the
ISDN line you are using.

6
7

• When you use the PCS-B384 ISDN
unit and connect 2 or 3 ISDN lines,
enter the telephone numbers in the B1
to C2 text boxes in addition to the A1
and A2 boxes.
When you use the PCS-B768 and
connect 2 to 6 ISDN lines, enter the
telephone numbers in the B1 to F2 text
boxes in addition to the A1 and A2
boxes. To open the menu with D1 to
F2 text boxes, select “Next”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.

Use the V, v, B or b button to select
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
Enter the telephone number of the
ISDN used by the system.
When you use one ISDN line, enter the
same number both in the A1 and A2 text
boxes (except for the USA and Canada).

8

Use the V, v, B or b button to select
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

9

Enter the sub-addresses.
Only numerals are available for a subaddress.
When you use one ISDN line, enter the
same number both in the A1 and A2 text
boxes (except for the USA and Canada).
Sub Address

Area Code

A1

Local Number

A1

A2

A2

B1

B1

B2

B2

C1

C1

C2

C2
Previous
Previous

32

Next

Cancel

Setting Up the System for the First Time — Initial Setup Wizard

Next

Cancel

Note

10Use the V, v, B or b button to select
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
For customers in other countries than
the USA and Canada
The LAN Setup Wizard appears.
For customers in the USA and
Canada
The ISDN Setup Wizard (SPID menu)
appears.
Set the SPID items, then select “Next”
and press the PUSH ENTER button.
The LAN Setup Wizard appears.
For details on the SPID settings, see
“SPID Setting for Customers in the USA
and Canada” on page 56.
Note

When you do not use the LAN, select
“Next” to display the message window for
confirmation, then proceed to step 13.

11Set the following items on the LAN.

Auto: Automatically assigns your IP
address, network mask, gateway
address and DNS address.
Off: Deactivates DHCP. In this case
set your IP address, network mask,
gateway address and DNS address
manually.
Host Name: Enter your host name.
IP Address: Enter your IP address.
Network Mask: Enter your network
mask.
Gateway Address: Enter your default
gateway address.
DNS Address: Enter your DNS
(Domain Name System) server
address.
Note

When you set “DHCP Mode” to “Auto”,
the assigned IP address is shown in the
launcher menu (page 70) or Machine
Information menu (page 59).

When you do not know how to set up the
LAN configuration, contact your
network administrator.

12Use the V, v, B or b button to select
“Next”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The message window for confirmation
appears.

13Use the V, v, B or b button to select
“Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

Save

LAN Setup Wizard

Previous
DHCP Mode

The settings are saved.

Host Name
IP Address

.

.

.

Network Mask

.

.

.

Gateway Address

.

.

.

DNS Address

.

.

.

Previous

Cancel

Off

Next

Cancel

DHCP Mode: Sets the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol).

To cancel the setting
Press the V, v, B or b button to select
“Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
To go back to the previous wizard
Press the V, v, B or b button to select
“Previous”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

Setting Up the System for the First Time — Initial Setup Wizard

33

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

When you use the PCS-B384 ISDN unit
and connect 2 or 3 ISDN lines, enter the
sub-addresses in the B1 to C2 text boxes in
addition to the A1 and A2 boxes.
When you use the PCS-B768 and connect
2 to 6 ISDN lines, enter the sub-addresses
in the B1 to F2 text boxes in addition to the
A1 and A2 boxes. To open the menu with
these text boxes, select “Next”, then press
the PUSH ENTER button.

Using the Menu

3

Press the V or v button to select the
item you want to set or adjust, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
The setting items are displayed.

The Video Communication System uses the
on-screen menus to make various
adjustments and settings. This section
describes how to adjust or set the items in the
menus and gives a brief introduction of the
menus.

Setup

Video/Audio
Multipoint Mode

Sound Priority
Picture Priority
Off

Motion Priority
More Options

For the menu configuration, see page 231.

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.

Save

Cancel

Operation
The basic operation through the menu is
explained by taking the Setup menu.

1

Press the MENU button on the
Remote Commander, or press the V,
v, B or b button to select “Menu” and
press the PUSH ENTER button in the
launcher menu.

4

Press the V or v button to select the
setting item you want, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.

5

Press the v button to select “Save”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Setup

The Setup menu appears.
Setup

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Video/Audio

Picture Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

Cancel

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

2

Cancel

Press the b button, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.
The top item is selected.
Setup

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

34

Using the Menu

Cancel

The selected setting is saved.
To return to the previous menu
Press the RETURN button on the Remote
Commander.

Menu Configurations
The menus of this system configure as described below.
For more detailed menu configurations, refer to “Menu Configuration” on
page 231.
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

Phone Book menu/Private Phone Book menu

Launcher menu

Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

Connect
Phone Book

TOKYO

Bob

John

IP

ISDN

ISDN

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS

0-9
A-I

Dial

J-S
T-Z

Menu

Angle Adj.

Press to show help

New Entry

IP:0.0.0.0
Video:Main

ISDN:012345678912
Audio:MIC(INT)+AUX

Dial menu
Dial
Line I/F
IP

IP

LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps

More Options

Dial

Save

Menu

Still Image menu

Setup

Still Image
Send

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Continuous Send
Clear
Save
Send Object

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

Cancel

Camera menu
Camera
Preset Save

Selecting the icons on the menu tabs shown on
the left side of the launcher menu displays each
menu.
Icon

Preset Load
Adjustments

Displayed menu

Memory Stick menu

Returns to the previous menu.

Memory Stick

Phone Book menu
Dial menu
Setup menu

Still Image menu

Setup

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Camera menu
Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

Memory Stick menu
Setup menu

Cancel

Setup

Setup menu
(for the administrator)

Dial
General

Answer
Audio

LAN

Administrator

ISDN

Multipoint

Information

Status

Encryption via LAN

SIP

Using the Menu

35

Launcher menu

The Dial menu is used to call a remote party
who is not registered in the Phone Book.
The menu appears when you select “Dial” in
the launcher menu or
from the menu
tabs, or press the CONNECT/
DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the
Remote Commander.

Connect
Phone Book
Dial

Menu

Angle Adj.

Press to show help

IP:0.0.0.0
Video:Main

ISDN:012345678912
Audio:MIC(INT)+AUX

The launcher menu appears when the Video
Communication System is turned on or is
displayed while it is not connected to a
remote party.
For details on the launcher menu, see pages
70 to 72.

For details on the Dial menu, see pages 74
to 78.
Still Image menu
Still Image
Send
Continuous Send
Clear
Save
Send Object

Phone Book menu
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

IP

ISDN

ISDN

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS
New Entry

The Phone Book menu is used to register a
remote party, or to call a registered remote
party.
The menu appears when you select “Phone
Book” in the Launcher menu or
from
the menu tabs.

The Still Image menu is used to control still
images.
The menu appears when you select
from the menu tabs displayed by selecting
“Menu” in the launcher menu.
For details on the Still Image menu, see
pages 106 to 113.
Camera Menu
Camera
Preset Save
Preset Load
Adjustments

For details on the Phone Book menu, see
pages 63 to 66 and 78 to 81.
Dial menu
Dial
Line I/F
IP

IP

LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps

The Camera menu is used to adjust camera
angle or zooming of the displayed image.
The menu appears when you select
from the menu tabs displayed by selecting
“Menu” in the launcher menu.
For details on the Camera menu, see pages
87 to 94.

More Options

36

Using the Menu

Dial

Save

Memory Stick menu

Setup menu (for the administrator)

Memory Stick

Setup

Dial

Answer

General

Audio
Administrator

ISDN

Multipoint

Information

Status

Encryption via LAN

SIP

The Memory Stick menu is used when you
are using a “Memory Stick”. The menu is
not displayed unless a “Memory Stick” is
installed in the Communication Terminal.
The menu appears when you select
from
the menu tabs displayed by selecting
“Menu” in the launcher menu.

The Setup menu for the administrator is used
to set various detailed items on the system.
The menu can be displayed by keeping the
MENU button on the Remote Commander
pressed.

For details on the Memory Stick menu, see
pages 99 to 103 and page 112.

You can also display the Setup menu for the
administrator by pressing the numeric button
9 on the Remote Commander twice while
the Setup menu (Initial Setup) or the screen
in communication is displayed.

Setup menu

Note

Setup

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

For details on the Setup menu (for the
administrator), see pages 39 to 61.

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

Cancel

The Setup menu is used for participants in
the videoconference before or during the
conference.
The menu appears when you select
from
the menu tabs displayed by selecting
“Menu” in the launcher menu or by pressing
the MENU button on the Remote
Commander.
For details on the Setup menu, see pages 73
and 74.

Using the Menu

37

Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation

LAN

desired symbol. Pressing the 0 button also
enables you to enter the symbol.

Entering Characters
This section explains how to enter the
letters, numerals or symbols on the text box
in the menu using the Remote Commander.
MIC
ON/OFF

VOLUME

ZOOM

DISPLAY

VIDEOINPUT
SELECT

CLEAR

SYMBOL

PinP

FAR/NEAR

BACK
SPACE

ALPHA/
NUM

VIDEO INPUT
SELECT (SYMBOL)
button
FAR/NEAR
(ALPHA/NUM)
button

PUSH
ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY (CLEAR)
button

MENU

CONNECT/
DISCONNECT

PinP (BACK
SPACE) button

Number buttons

(dot) button
HELP

PCS-R1

To enter letters or numerals

1

Press the FAR/NEAR (ALPHA/
NUM) button repeatedly to enable the
alphabet or numerals to be input.

2

Press the number buttons repeatedly to
enter the letters or numerals you want.
You can enter the letter shown on each
button by pressing it repeatedly.
You can enter the numeral shown on
each button by pressing it.

To enter a symbol
Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT
(SYMBOL) button repeatedly to select the

38

Using the Menu

To enter a dot (.) for an IP address
Press the
button.
To delete a character
Press the PinP (BACK SPACE) button. The
last entered character is deleted.
To delete all characters in a line
Move the cursor to the line to be deleted,
then press the DISPLAY (CLEAR) button.
Note

When you press the HELP button on the
Remote Commander to show balloon helps or
help screens, you can hide only the balloon
help used for entering characters.
Select “Character Input Help” from the
General Setup menu, then select “Off”. (See
page 47.)

Chapter 2:
Registration and
Setup for System
Administrators

2

The Setup menu for the administrator
appears on the monitor screen.
Setup

Dial

Answer

General

Audio

LAN

Administrator

ISDN

Multipoint

Information

Status

Encryption via LAN

SIP

Note

You can also display the Setup menu for
the administrator by pressing the numeric
button 9 on the Remote Commander twice
while the initial Setup menu (shown in step
1) or the screen in communication is
displayed.

Registering Local
Information

Choosing the following items from the
Setup menu for Administrator opens the
respective menus.
Dial: Dial Setup menu (see page 40)
Answer: Answer Setup menu (see page
43)
General: General Setup menu (see page
45)
Audio: Audio Setup menu (see page 48)
LAN: LAN Setup menu (see page 50)
Administrator: Administrator Setup
menu (see page 53)
ISDN: ISDN Setup menu (see page 54)
Multipoint: Multipoint Setup menu (see
page 57)
Information: Machine Information
menu (see page 59)
Status: Status menu (see page 60)
Encryption via LAN: Encryption via
LAN menu (see page 61)
SIP: SIP Setup menu (see page 62)

Before starting a conference, register the
required information on the local terminals
of the system using the Setup menu for
administrator. This section describes how to
display the Setup menus for the
administrator and gives a introduction to the
menus.

Opening the Setup Menu for
the Administrator
Press the MENU button on the
Remote Commander, or use the V, v,
B or b button to select “MENU” in the
launcher menu, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The initial Setup menu appears on the
monitor screen.
Setup

3
Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select the
menu you want to set, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.
Save

Cancel

Registering Local Information

39

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

This chapter describes the registration and
settings to be carried out by the system
administrator.The chapter is intended to be
read by the system administrator.

1

Keep the MENU button pressed.

The selected setup menu appears.

Dial Setup Menu

Dial Setup

The Dial Setup menu is used to set the
attributes for dialing.

Page: 1/4
Line I/F

IP

Bonding

Auto

Number of Lines

12B (768K)

LAN Bandwidth

1024 Kbps

Prefix

Prefix-None

Restrict

Auto
Save

4

Page 1/4
Dial Setup
Page: 1/4
Cancel

Set the respective items.
For details on individual items, see the
relevant menu pages.

5

After the setting is completed, use the
V, v, B or b button to select “Save”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The setting is saved, and the Setup menu
is restored.

To cancel the setup
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote
Commander to select “Cancel”, then press
the PUSH ENTER button. Or press the
RETURN button on the Remote
Commander.
To page up or down the selected
menu
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote
Commander to select the Page box, then
press the b button to advance the page and
the B button to go back to the previous page.

Line I/F

IP

Bonding

Auto

Number of Lines

12B (768K)

LAN Bandwidth

1024 Kbps

Prefix

Prefix-None

Restrict

Auto
Save

Cancel

Line I/F
Select the line interface you use normally.
IP: Connects a videoconferencing system
via a LAN.
ISDN: Connects a videoconferencing
system via ISDN.
ISDN (Telephone): Connects an audio-only
telephone via ISDN (Voice Meeting).
SIP: Connects an IP phone using SIP
(Session Initiation Protocol).
Bonding*
Select whether you use a process called
BONDING to connect multiple ISDN lines.
Through BONDING, connection of one line
enables you to automatically connect all
other lines.
Auto: Automatically activates connection
through BONDING if this feature is
available on the remote party.
On: Always connects a remote party
through BONDING.
*

Bonding (Bandwidth on Demand
Interoperability Group) is a registered
trademark of THE BONDING
CONSORTIUM.

Number of Lines
Selects the number of ISDN channels to be
used for BONDING call.
You can select from among 1B(64K),
2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K) and
12B(768K) channels.

40

Registering Local Information

LAN Bandwidth
Selects the bandwidth to be used when
connected to a LAN.
You can select from among 64 Kbps, 128
Kbps, 256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 512 Kbps, 768
Kbps, 1024 Kbps, 1920 Kbps and “Other”.
When “Other” is selected, a bandwidth value
between 1 and 1920 Kbps can be entered.

For details on setting the prefix number, see
Page 3 of the Dial Setup Menu on page 42.
Restrict
Selects the ISDN transmission rate at
dialing.
Auto: Selects when connecting a remote
party via a normal ISDN line.
56K: Selects when connecting a remote
party in a region or country where the
ISDN transmission rate is 56 Kbps.
Note

The system is set to connect an ISDN line at the
transmission rate of 64 Kbps at the factory.
However, some countries such as the USA or
some regions may use the ISDN transmission
rate of 64 Kbps and 56 Kbps. You may not
communicate with such country or region with
the transmission rate of 64 Kbps. In this case,
set “Restrict” to “56K” before dialing.

Dial Setup
Page: 2/4
Video Mode

ALL

Video Frame

15fps

Audio Mode

ALL

Far End Camera Control

On

T.120 Data

Off

H.239

On
Save

Cancel

Video Mode
Selects the compression format of the
pictures to be sent to a remote party.
ALL: Sends pictures of any compression
format depending on the format used on
the remote site.
Interlaced SIF: Sends pictures based on the
interlaced SIF.
H.264: Sends pictures based on
Recommendation H.264.
MPEG4: Sends pictures based on the
MPEG4 format.
H.263+: Sends pictures based on
Recommendation H.263+.
H.261: Sends pictures based on
Recommendation H.261 (when sending
still images using Annex D).
No Video: Sends audio only without
pictures.
Note

The Interlaced SIF format is not available if the
videoconferencing system of the connected
terminal has a different color system.

Video Frame
Selects the number of video frame for
transmission.
15fps: Sends CIF format pictures at a
maximum rate of 15 frames per second.
30fps: Sends CIF format pictures at a
maximum rate of 30 frames per second.
Note

When an encrypted videoconference is
conducted and a computer picture is received
with “Monitor Out” set to “RGB OUT”, the
number of video frame may decrease.

Registering Local Information

41

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Prefix
Selects the prefix number (call number
prefixed to a line number) setting.
Prefix-None: Sets when using no prefix
number.
Prefix-A: Selects to use the prefix set in
“Prefix-A” on Page 3 of the Dial Setup
menu.
Prefix-B: Selects to use the prefix set in
“Prefix-B” on Page 3 of the Dial Setup
menu.
Prefix-C: Selects to use the prefix set in
“Prefix-C” on Page 3 of the Dial Setup
menu.

Page 2/4

Audio Mode
Selects the compression format of audio to
be sent to a remote party.
ALL: Sends any audio compression format
depending on the format used on the
remote site.
MPEG4 Audio: Sends audio based on the
MPEG4 format.
G.722.1: Sends audio based on the G.722.1
standard.
G.722: Sends audio based on the G.722
standard.
G.729: Sends audio based on the G.729
standard.
G.728: Sends audio based on the G.728
standard.
G.723.1: Sends audio based on the G.723.1
standard.
G.711: Sends audio based on the G.711
standard.
Note

When the remote videoconferencing system
does not support the Audio Mode selected by
the local site, the mode automatically switches
to “G.711”.

Far End Camera Control
When the conference starts by calling a
remote party from the local site, selects
whether to enable control of each other’s
cameras from each other sites.
On: Enables control of each other’s
cameras. Normally, set to ON.
Off: Disables control of each other’s
cameras.
T.120 Data
Selects whether you conduct a data
conference via the T.120 standard using
NetMeeting (only for the ISDN connection).
On: Enables conduct of the T.120 data
conference.
Off: Disables conduct of the T.120 data
conference.
For details on the T.120 data conference,
see “Conducting a Data Conference Using
NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference” on
page 128.

42

Registering Local Information

H.239
Selects whether you use the dual video
presentation mode based on the H.239
standard.
On: Enables the dual video presentation
mode based on the H.239 standard.
Off: Disables the dual video presentation
mode based on the H.239 standard.

Page 3/4
Dial Setup
Page: 3/4
Prefix-A
Prefix-B
Prefix-C

Save

Cancel

Prefix-A
When “Prefix” on Page 1 of the Dial Setup
menu is set to “Prefix-A”, the line number
prefixed by the prefix (dial number)
registered in this box is dialed.
Prefix-B
When “Prefix” on Page 1 of the Dial Setup
menu is set to “Prefix-B”, the line number
prefixed by the prefix (dial number)
registered in this box is dialed.
Prefix-C
When “Prefix” on Page 1 of the Dial Setup
menu is set to “Prefix-C”, the line number
prefixed by the prefix (dial number)
registered in this box is dialed.
Note

Enter “9” when this is required to reach an
outgoing call.

Page 4/4

Answer Setup Menu
The Answer Setup menu is used to set up for
receiving a call.

Dial Setup
Page: 4/4
Telephone Mode

Auto

More Options Enable

Off

User Name Input

Off

Page 1/2
Answer Setup
Page: 1/2
Auto Answer
Save

Cancel

More Options Enable
Selects whether you set the items in the Dial
Setup menu for each dial list.
On: Enables setting for each dial list. When
you select “More Options Enable” in the
List Edit menu of the Phone Book, the
Dial Setup menu appears.
Off: Enables application of the settings in
the Dial Setup menu to all the dial lists.
User Name Input
Before starting communication, selects
whether you record the user names in the
communication log.
On: Records the user names. Each time a
dialing is made, the menu where the
name is input appears.
Off: Disables recording of the user names.

12B (768K)

Restrict

Auto

LAN Bandwidth

1024 Kbps

ISDN MSN

Off

Mic on Answer

On
Save

Cancel

Auto Answer
Selects whether the auto answer mode is
activated.
Auto Answer: Answers a call in auto
answer mode. When a call comes in, the
line is automatically connected.
Off: Answers a call in manual answer mode.
When you are called up, the phone rings.
If you select “OK” for the message
“Respond?”, the line is connected.
Number of Lines
Selects the number of ISDN channels used
to receive a call.
You can select from among 1B(64K),
2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K),
12B(768K) channels.
Restrict
Selects the transmission rate of the ISDN
lines when a call comes in.
Auto: Selects when connecting a remote
party via a normal ISDN line.
56 K: Selects when connecting a remote
party in a region or country where 56
Kbps is used for the ISDN transmission
rate.
Note

The system is set to connect an ISDN line at the
transmission rate of 64 Kbps at the factory.
However, some countries such as the USA or
some regions may use the ISDN transmission
rate of 64 Kbps and 56 Kbps. You may not
communicate with such country or region with
Registering Local Information

43

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Telephone Mode
Selects the audio compression format when
conducting a voice meeting.
Auto: Selects an appropriate format
automatically.
G.711 µ-law: Selects the format based on
the G.711 µ-law standard.
G.711 A-law: Selects the format based on
the G.711 A-law standard.

ISDN
Auto Answer

Number of Lines

the transmission rate of 64 Kbps. In this case,
set “Restrict” to “56K” before dialing.

H.263+: Receives pictures based on
Recommendation H.263+.
H.261: Receives pictures based on
Recommendation H.261.
No Video: Receives audio only without
pictures.

LAN Bandwidth
Select the bandwidth to be used when
connected to a LAN.
You can select from among 64 Kbps, 128
Kbps, 256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 512 Kbps, 768
Kbps, 1024 Kbps, 1920 Kbps and “Other”.
When “Other” is selected, a bandwidth value
between 1 and 1920 Kbps can be entered.

The Interlaced SIF format is not available if the
videoconferencing system of the connected
terminal has a different color system.

ISDN MSN
Selects whether you are using the Multiple
Subscriber Number.
On: Selects when you use the Multiple
Subscriber Number.
Off: Selects when you do not use the
Multiple Subscriber Number.

Video Frame
Selects the number of video frame to be
received.
15 fps: Receives CIF format pictures at a
maximum rate of 15 frames per second.
30 fps: Receives CIF format pictures at a
maximum rate of 30 frames per second.

Mic on Answer
Selects whether to transmit the sound on
your site when answering a call from the
remote party.
On: Transmits the sound when answering a
call.
Off: Disables transmission of the sound
when answering a call.

Audio Mode
Selects the compression format of audio to
be received from a remote party.
ALL: Receives any audio compression
format depending on the format used on
the remote site.
MPEG4 Audio: Receives audio based on
the MPEG4 format.
G.722.1: Receives audio based on the
G.722.1 standard.
G.722: Receives audio based on the G.722
standard.
G.729: Receives audio based on the G.729
standard.
G.728: Receives audio based on the G.728
standard.
G.723.1: Receives audio based on the
G.723.1 standard.
G.711: Receives audio based on the G.711
standard.

Page 2/2
Answer Setup
Page: 2/2
Video Mode

ISDN
ALL

Video Frame

15fps

Audio Mode

ALL

Far End Camera Control

On

T.120 Data

Off

H.239

On
Save

Cancel

Video Mode
Selects the compression format of the
pictures to be received from a remote party.
ALL: Receives pictures of any compression
format depending on the format used on
the remote site.
Interlaced SIF: Receives pictures based on
the interlaced SIF.
H.264: Receives pictures based on
Recommendation H.264.
MPEG4: Receives pictures based on the
MPEG4 format.

44

Registering Local Information

Note

Note

When the remote videoconferencing system
does not support the Audio Mode selected by
the local site, the mode automatically switches
to “G.711”.

Far End Camera Control
When the conference starts with a call from
a remote party, selects whether to enable
control of each other’s cameras from each
other’s sites.

On: Enables control of each other’s
cameras.
Off: Disables control of the remote party’s
camera.

For details on the T.120 data conference,
see “Conducting a Data Conference Using
NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference” on
page 128.
H.239
Selects whether you use the dual video
presentation mode based on the H.239
standard.
On: Enables the dual video presentation
mode based on the H.239 standard.
Off: Disables the dual video presentation
mode based on the H.239 standard.

Page 1/4
General Setup
Page: 1/4
Terminal Name

PCS-1ISDN

Dual Monitor

Off

Monitor Out

VIDEO OUT

Standby Mode

On

Standby Time

30 minutes

Time Display

On
Save

Cancel

Terminal Name
Input the terminal name to report when the
system is connected to the external
multipoint videoconferencing system.
Dual Monitor
When two monitors are connected to the
System, selects whether you use the dual
monitor mode.
On: Enables the dual monitor mode. Still
images are always displayed on the
second monitor.
Off: Disables the dual monitor mode. Still
images are always displayed on the first
monitor.
For details on the dual monitor mode, see
“Using Two Monitors – Dual Monitor” on
page 115.
Monitor Out (or Sub Monitor Out)
Selects the output connected to the monitor
to which the signal is output.
This item changes to “Sub Monitor Out” if
“Dual Monitor” is set to “On”, and selects
the output connected to the sub-monitor
(second monitor) to which the signal is
output.
RGB OUT: Outputs from the RGB OUT
connector on the Communication
Terminal.
RGB OUT (DSB): Outputs from the RGB
OUT connector on the Data Solution
Box.
VIDEO OUT: Outputs from the VIDEO
OUT MONITOR MAIN or SUB
connector.
For details, see “Displaying the Picture on
a Projector or Monitor” on page 142.
Registering Local Information

45

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

T.120 Data
Selects whether you conduct a data
conference via the T.120 standard using
NetMeeting (only for the ISDN connection).
On: Enables conduct of the T.120 data
conference.
Off: Disables conduct of the T.120 data
conference.

General Setup Menu

Standby Mode
Sets whether the Communication Terminal
is set to standby mode if it is not operated for
a specified period of time.
On: Activates standby mode.
Off: Deactivates standby mode.
Standby Time
Specifies the time that the system remains on
before entering the standby mode. You can
specify a time between 1 and 99 minutes.
For details on standby mode, see “Standby
Mode Function” on page 27.
Time Display
Selects whether you display the elapsed time
on the monitor screen during the conference.
On: Displays the elapsed time.
Off: Does not display the elapsed time.
Note

During communication, some items are not
displayed.

Page 2/4
General Setup
Page: 2/4
Clock Set

MM/DD/YYYY

HH:MM:SS

11/30/2003

19:25:53

Last Number Registration
T.120 PC Address

On
.

Whiteboard Attachment

Vertical

Whiteboard Size

3'0"x4'0"

Whiteboard Size Measurement

Inches

.

.

Save

Cancel

Clock Set
Enter the current date and time.
Last Number Registration
Selects whether or not to register the remote
party in the Phone Book after the conference
has finished.
On: If the remote party has not yet been
registered in the Phone Book, the
message “Register this participant in the
list?” appears on the monitor screen after
the conference has finished. When you
select “OK”, the List Edit menu opens.
Off: The above message does not appear.

46

Registering Local Information

T.120 PC Address
When conducting a data conference based
on the T.120 standard using NetMeeting,
input the IP address of the computer (for the
ISDN connection).
For details on a data conference based on
the T.120 standard, see “Conducting a Data
Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data
Conference” on page 128.
Whiteboard Attachment
Selects whether to attach the optional
mimio-Xi vertically or horizontally on a
whiteboard.
Vertical: Attaches the mimio-Xi vertically
on a whiteboard.
Horizontal: Attaches the mimio-Xi
horizontally on a whiteboard.
Whiteboard Size
Selects the size (height × width) of the
whiteboard you are using. The sizes shown
in the menu change according to
“Whiteboard Attachment” setting.
Selects from among 2'0" × 3'0" (0.6 ×
0.9 m), 3'0" × 4'0" (0.9 × 1.2 m), 4'0" × 6'0"
(1.2 × 1.8 m) and 4'0" × 8'0" (1.2 × 2.4 m)
when “Whiteboard Attachment” is set to
“Vertical”.
Selects from among 3'0" × 2'0" (0.9× 0.6 m),
4'0" × 3'0" (1.2 × 0.9 m), 6'0" × 4'0" (1.8 ×
1.2 m) and 8'0" × 4'0" (2.4 × 1.2 m) when
“Whiteboard Attachment” is set to
“Horizontal”.
Whiteboard Size Measurement
Selects whether to display the whiteboard
size in inches or meters.
Inches: Displays the whiteboard size in
inches.
Meters: Displays the whiteboard size in
meters.

Control by Far End
When “Far End Camera Control” is set to
“On” in the Dial Setup menu on the local
party and in the Answer Setup menu on the
remote party, you can temporarily reject the
camera control command transmitted by the
remote party.
On: Accepts the camera control command.
Off: Rejects the camera control command.

Page 3/4
General Setup
Page: 3/4
Language

English

IR Repeater Mode

MODE1

Control by Far End

On

Character Input Help

On

Memory Stick Format

Save

Cancel

IR Repeater Mode
Selects the remote control mode of the IR
repeater.
MODE 1: (For customers who are using the
PCS-1 Video Communication System
only)
Normally, select this mode.
MODE 2: (For customers who are using the
PCS-1 Video Communication System
only)
Select this mode if the System does not
operate properly with the MODE 1
setting.
MODE 3: (For customers who are using the
PCS-1P Video Communication System
only)
Normally, select this mode.
MODE 4: (For customers who are using the
PCS-1P Video Communication System
only)
Select this mode if the System does not
operate properly with the MODE 3
setting.

Memory Stick Format
Formats the “Memory Stick”.
Note

If you format the “Memory Stick”, all the data
including the still images and Phone Book
stored will be lost.

Page 4/4
General Setup
Page: 4/4

Custom Input Label

Main
Object
AUX1
AUX2

Save

Cancel

You can label each video input displayed in
the launcher menu or Video Input Select
menu (page 95) on the local site.
Main
Enter the label to be displayed when “Main”
(main camera) is selected in the Video Input
Select menu.
Object
Enter the label to be displayed when
“Object” (optional PCS-DS150 Document
Stand) is selected in the Video Input Select
menu.

Registering Local Information

47

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Language
Selects the language used for messages or
menus.
You can select among from 17 languages;
English, French, German, Japanese,
Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese,
Portuguese, Tradition Chinese, Korean,
Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Polish,
Russian, Arabic.

Character Input Help
Selects whether or not to hide a help balloon
used for entering characters or numerics .
On: Displays the balloon help items for
entering characters.
Off: Hide the balloon help items for entering
characters.

AUX1
Enter the label to be displayed when
“AUX1” (equipment connected to the
VIDEO IN AUX1 on the Communication
Terminal) is selected in the Video Input
Select menu.
AUX2
Enter the label to be displayed when
“AUX2” (equipment connected to the
VIDEO IN AUX2 on the Communication
Terminal) is selected in the Video Input
Select menu.

Audio Setup Menu
The Audio Setup menu is used to set various
audio items.

Page 1/2
The level meter indicating the audio input
level is displayed.
Audio Setup
Page: 1/2
Input Select

MIC

Mic Select

Internal

CTE

Off

Echo Canceler

Internal

Lip Sync

Off

Recording Mute

On
Save

Cancel

Input Select
Selects the sound to be input.
MIC: Inputs the sound of the microphone.
AUX: Inputs the sound from external
equipment.
MIC+AUX: Inputs both sounds from the
microphone and external equipment.
Mic Select
Selects the microphone to be used.
Internal: Uses the built-in microphone.
External: Uses the microphone connected
to the Communication Terminal.
DSB MIC: Uses the microphone connected
to the Data Solution Box.
CTE
Selects the input to which the CTE-600
Communication Transducer is connected.
Off: Does not use the CTE-600
Communication Transducer.
AUX: Inputs from the AUDIO IN jack on
the Communication Terminal.
DSB AUX IN: Inputs from the AUX IN jack
on the Data Solution box.
Echo Canceler
Selects whether you use the echo canceler.
Internal: Enables the built-in echo canceler.
External: Uses the echo canceler of the
external equipment connected.
The input from the AUDIO IN jack on
the Communication Terminal is always

48

Registering Local Information

available regardless of the “Input
Select” setting.
Off: Disables the built-in echo canceler.
Lip Sync
Selects whether to enable the Lip Sync
function.
On: Enables the Lip Sync function. The
movement of the speaker’s lips is
synchronized with his voice.
Off: Disables the Lip Sync function.

Dial Tone
Selects whether or not to output a ring-back
tone and busy tone when you are dialing.
On: Outputs the dial tone.
Off: Does not output the dial tone.
Ringer Tone
Selects whether or not to output a ringer tone
when you receive a call.
On: Outputs the ringer tone.
Off: Does not output the ringer tone.
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Recording Mute
When connecting a video cassette recorder
to the AUDIO IN/AUDIO OUT (MIXED)
jacks to record the sound for a conference,
the recording mute function prevents echo
from reflecting on a remote site. This item is
only available when “Input Select” is set to
“AUX” or “MIC + AUX”.
On: Enables the recording mute function.
Off: Disables the recording mute function.

Page 2/2
Audio Setup
Page: 2/2
Beep Sound

On

Sound Effect

On

Dial Tone

On

Ringer Tone

On

Save

Cancel

Beep Sound
Selects whether the beep sounds when you
press the button on the Remote Commander.
On: Enables beep.
Off: Disables beep.
Sound Effect
Selects whether or not to output the sound
when the system starts up, a
videoconference starts, or the
videoconference ends.
On: Outputs the sound.
Off: Does not output the sound.

Registering Local Information

49

Page 2/8

LAN Setup Menu
When you conduct a conference via a LAN,
set the items in the LAN Setup menu.

LAN Setup
Page: 2/8
Gatekeeper Mode

For details on the settings, consult with the
network administrator.

Off

Gatekeeper Address
User Alias
User Number

Page 1/8
Save

LAN Setup

Cancel

Page: 1/8
DHCP Mode
Host Name

Off
Auto

IP Address

Auto

Network Mask

Auto

Gateway Address

Auto

DNS Address

Auto
Save

Cancel

DHCP Mode
Selects whether DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server is enabled or
not.
Auto: The IP address and network mask are
automatically assigned.
In this case, confirm the assigned IP
address, network mask, gateway
address, and DNS address in the
launcher menu or the Machine
Information menu after the LAN
connection is completed.
Off: Sets “DHCP Mode” to “Off”. In this
case, enter the IP address, network
mask, gateway address and DNS
address.

Gatekeeper Mode
Sets whether you use the gatekeeper that
controls access to a LAN.
Using the gatekeeper allows you to dial
using the user name or user number.
On: Enables use of the gatekeeper.
Off: Disables use of the gatekeeper.
Auto: Detects the gatekeeper automatically
and uses it.
Gatekeeper Address
Enter the gatekeeper address used when
“Gatekeeper Mode” is set to “On”.
User Alias
Enter the user name (H.323 alias) to be
registered in the gatekeeper.
User Number
Enter the user number (E.164 number) to be
registered in the gatekeeper.

Page 3/8
LAN Setup

Host Name
Enter the host name.

Page: 3/8
SNMP Mode

Off

Trap Destination

IP address
Enter the IP address.

Community

Public

Description

Videoconference Device

Location

Network Mask
Enter the network mask.
Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway address.
DNS Address
Enter the DNS (Domain Name System)
address.

50

Registering Local Information

Contact

Save

Cancel

SNMP Mode
Selects whether the SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol) agent service is
enabled or not.
On: Enables the SNMP agent service.
Off: Disables the SNMP agent service.

Trap Destination
Enter the address of the trap destination
SNMP manager.
Community
Enter the community name managed by the
SNMP manager. The default setting is
“public”. Normally, there is no need to
change.

Off: Does not request resending a packet.
Adaptive Rate Control
Sets whether or not to always optimize the
LAN bandwidth.
On: Always optimizes.
Off: Disables optimization of the LAN
bandwidth.
Note

This item is enabled only when “Packet Resend
Request” is set to “Off”. When “Packet Resend
Request” is set to “On”, this item is always set
to “On”.

Location
Enter the location where this terminal is
installed.

LAN Mode
Selects the interface type and the
communication mode of the LAN
connection.
Auto Negotiation: The interface type and
the communication mode are recognized
automatically.
100Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via
100BASE-TX in full duplex mode.
100Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via
100BASE-TX in half duplex mode.
10Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via
10BASE-T in full duplex mode.
10Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via
10BASE-T in half duplex mode.

Contact
Enter information on the administrator of
this terminal.

Page 4/8
LAN Setup
Page: 4/8
NAT Mode

Off

NAT Address
Packet Resend Request

On

Adaptive Rate Control

On

LAN Mode

Auto Negotiation

Save

Page 5/8
Cancel

LAN Setup
Page: 5/8

NAT Mode
Selects whether you connect the system to a
local network using NAT (Network Address
Translation) that enables sharing of one IP
address for multiple computers on the same
LAN.
On: Enables NAT mode.
Off: Disables NAT mode.
NAT Address
Enter the IP address of a global network to
be used for NAT mode.
Packet Resend Request
Selects whether or not to request to resend
the packet when a packet loss occurs during
communication.
On: Requests resending a packet.

Port Number Used

Default

TCP Port Number

2253 – 2263

UDP Port Number

49152 – 49239

Save

Cancel

Port Number Used
Selects whether or not to fix the TCP port
number and UDP port number.
Custom: Uses the port numbers set by the
user.
Default: Uses the default port numbers,
2253 for the TCP port number and
49152 for the UDP port number.

Registering Local Information

51

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Description
Enter the description of this terminal. The
default setting is “Videoconference Device”
and cannot be changed.

TCP Port Number
When “Port Number Used” is set to
“Custom”, enter the TCP port number.
The display shows usable port numbers.
UDP Port Number
When “Port Number Used” is set to
“Custom”, enter the UDP port number.
The display shows usable port numbers.
For details on the port numbers used, see
“List of Port Numbers Used on the PCS-1/
1P” on page 224.

Page 6/8

IP Precedence

IP Precedence

0

Low Delay

Off

High Throughput

Off

High Reliability

Off

Minimum Cost

Off

Minimum Cost
Selects whether or not to specify the bit rate
of Minimum Cost for the TOS field.
On: Specifies the bit rate of Minimum Cost
for the TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the bit rate of
Minimum Cost for the TOS field.
Diffserve
Enter the Diffserve value (0 – 64).
This item is displayed only when “TOS” is
set to “Diffserve”.

LAN Setup
Page: 6/8
TOS

High Reliability
Selects whether or not to specify the bit rate
of High Reliability for the TOS field.
On: Specifies the bit rate of High Reliability
for the TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the bit rate of High
Reliability for the TOS field.

Page 7/8
LAN Setup
Save

Cancel
Page: 7/8
PPPoE

TOS
Selects how to define the TOS (Type of
Service) field.
Off: Does not define the TOS field.
IP Precedence: Defines the TOS field as IP
Precedence.
Diffserve: Defines the TOS field as
Diffserve.
IP Precedence
Enter the IP Precedence value (0 – 7).
Low Delay
Selects whether or not to specify the bit rate
of Low Delay for the TOS field.
On: Specifies the bit rate of Low Delay for
the TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the bit rate of Low
Delay for the TOS field.
High Throughput
Selects whether or not to specify the bit rate
of High Throughput for the TOS field.
On: Specifies the bit rate of High
Throughput for the TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the bit rate of High
Throughput for the TOS field.

52

Registering Local Information

Off

PPPoE User Name
PPPoE Password

Save

Cancel

PPPoE
Selects whether or not to use PPPoE for
LAN connection.
You can use the B FLET’S* or FLET’S
ADSL services without connecting a router
when using PPPoE.
On: Uses PPPoE for LAN connection.
Off: Does not use PPPoE.
Note

Operations of PPPoE for LAN connection are
presently verified only for Japanese NTT B
FLET’S and FLET’S ADSL services.
* “FLET’S” is a trademark of NTT East and
NTT West Corporations in Japan.

PPPoE User Name
Enter a user name when you use PPPoE for
LAN connection.
PPPoE Password
Enter a password when you use PPPoE for
LAN connection.

Page 8/8
LAN Setup

Administrator Setup
Obtain automatically

Primary DNS

Page: 1/2
Administrator Passward

Secondary DNS
Superuser Passward
Remote Access Passward
Save

Fixed IP for PPPoE
Selects whether or not to make a PPPoE
connection using the fixed IP.
On: Uses the fixed IP for a PPPoE
connection.
Off: Does not use the fixed IP for a PPPoE
connection.
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE
Enter the fixed IP address when “Fixed IP
for PPPoE” is set to “On”.
PPPoE DNS
Selects whether to obtain the DNS server
addresses automatically or to specify them
manually when connecting to LAN using
PPPoE.
Specify: Specifies the DNS server
addresses.
Obtain automatically: Allows you to
obtain the DNS server addresses
automatically.
Primary DNS
Enter a primary DNS address.
Secondary DNS
Enter a secondary DNS address.

Web Monitor

On

Web Access

Enabled

Cancel

Save

Cancel

Administrator Password
Sets the password for the system
administrator. The administrator password
is valid to modify the items in the Setup
menu for the administrator and in the Phone
Book menu.
The items in the Setup menu for the
administrator and in the Phone Book menu
can be changed by the administrator.
Superuser Password
Sets the password for the super-user. The
superuser password is valid to modify the
items in the Phone Book menu.
Remote Access Password
Sets the password required to access this
System from a Web browser. Accessing
from a Web browser is also enabled by
entering the administrator or superuser
password.
Web Monitor
Selects whether or not to permit monitoring
of the JPEG images of this System via a Web
browser.
On: Permits monitoring via a Web browser.
Off: Disables monitoring.

Registering Local Information

53

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Off

Fixed IP address for PPPoE
PPPoE DNS

The Administrator Setup menu is used for
the system administrators. If you have set
the password with this menu, you need to
enter it when accessing the setup menus or
Phone Book menus to change the items.
Entering the password is also required to
access the Administrator Setup menu.

Page 1/2

Page: 8/8
Fixed IP for PPPoE

Administrator Setup Menu

Web Access
Selects whether or not to permit accessing
the PCS-1/1P via a Web browser or Telnet.
Disabled: Prohibits accessing via a Web
browser or Telnet.
Enabled: Permits accessing via a Web
browser or Telnet.

Page 2/2

ISDN Setup Menu
The ISDN Setup menu is used to set up the
ISDN lines.
Note

The ISDN Setup menu is displayed only
when the optional PCS-B384 or PCS-B768
ISDN Unit is installed to your system.

Administrator Setup

Page 1/7

Page: 2/2
Save Phone Book

ISDN Setup

Load Phone Book
Auto Dialing

Page: 1/7
On
Country/Region

Create Private Phone Book
Delete Private Phone Book
Copy to Private Phone Book
Save

1

Protocol

National ISDN

Cancel

Save Phone Book
Saves the data in the Phone Book in a
“Memory Stick”. The data in the “Memory
Stick” will be overwritten.
Load Phone Book
Loads the data in the Phone Book from a
“Memory Stick”. The data in the Phone
Book will be overwritten.
Auto Dialing
You can create a Private Phone Book in a
“Memory Stick”.
This item is used to select whether or not to
automatically dial the address of a specified
list in the Private Phone Book simply by
inserting the “Memory Stick”.
On: Enables automatic dialing.
Off: Disables automatic dialing.
Create Private Phone Book
Selects to create an empty folder and file for
a Private Phone Book in an inserted
“Memory Stick”.
Delete Private Phone Book
Selects to delete the Private Phone Book
folder in the inserted “Memory Stick”.
Copy to Private Phone book
Selects to copy all the contents of the Phone
Book to a Private Phone Book in the inserted
“Memory Stick”.

54

ISDN
USA

Country/Region Code

Registering Local Information

Save

Cancel

Country/Region
Selects the country or region where you use
the Communication Terminal.
You can select from among Europe
(excluding France), France, Japan, USA,
China and Other.
Country/Region Code
Enter the country code or region code.
For customers in the USA and Canada, see
“SPID Setting for Customers in the USA and
Canada” on page 56.
Protocol
Selects the protocol of the ISDN lines to be
used.
You can select ITU-T, Euro ISDN, Euro
ISDN (France), National ISDN, 5ESS(PMP), 5ESS(P-P) or DMS-100 depending on
the interface you are using.
For customers in the USA and Canada, see
“SPID Setting for Customers in the USA and
Canada” on page 56.

Page 2/7

Page 6/7

Shows the A1 to C2 text boxes for inputting
the telephone numbers.

Shows the A1 to C2 text boxes for inputting
the telephone numbers and the Auto SPID
tab.

ISDN Setup
Page: 2/7

ISDN Setup
Area Code

Local Number
Page: 6/7

A1

SPID

A2

A1

B1

A2

B2

B1

C1

B2

C2

C1
Cancel

C2
Auto SPID

Area Code
Enter the area code to be used for the ISDN
interface. Do not enter the first “0” number
of your area code.
Local Number
Enter the telephone number (local number)
to be used for the ISDN interface.
Note

The D1-F2 text boxes are shown on the next
page (Page 3). Fill in the boxes depending on
the lines you connect. (Only when the PCSB768 ISDN unit is used).

Save

Cancel

SPID
This item is used only for customers in the
USA and Canada.
For details, see “SPID Setting for
Customers in the USA and Canada”.
Auto SPID
This item is used only for customers in the
USA and Canada.
For details, see “SPID Setting for
Customers in the USA and Canada”.
Notes

Page 4/7
Shows the A1 to C2 text boxes for inputting
the telephone numbers.
ISDN Setup
Page: 4/7
Sub Address:

• The D1-F2 text boxes are shown on the next
page (Page 7). Fill in the boxes depending on
the lines you connect.
• The SPID menu does not appear depending
on the protocol you selected on Page 1.

A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
Save

Cancel

Sub Address
Enter the sub-addresses when registering
them. Only numerals are available for a subaddress.
Note

The D1-F2 text boxes are shown on the next
page (Page 5). Fill in the boxes depending on
the lines you connect. (Only when the PCSB768 ISDN unit is used).
Registering Local Information

55

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Save

Auto SPID

Enter the same LDNs in the A1 and A2
(B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending on
the number of lines you use) text boxes.

SPID Setting for Customers in
the USA and Canada
If you connect to an ISDN switch type,
configuration of SPID (Service Profile
Identifier) is required. When you select
“Auto SPID” in the ISDN Setup Wizard (see
page 32), the “Area Code”, “Local Number”
and “SPID” setup items are automatically
set.
If “Auto SPID” is not available in your area,
set up SPID manually using the ISDN Setup
menu.

1

Open the ISDN Setup menu.

2

Enter the country code in the Country/
Region Code text box depending on
the network switch type you are using.

ISDN Setup
Page: 2/7
Area Code

9876532

C1
C2

Auto SPID

ISDN
USA
1

Protocol

National ISDN

ISDN Setup

Area Code

Local Number

A1

408

9876543

A2

408

9876544

B1
B2
C1
C2

Save

Cancel

When you use the AT&T 5ESS
(National ISDN) switch type
You may enter the same or different
numbers in two channels.

4
Save

Cancel

Page: 2/7

Auto SPID

Country/Region Code

Save

When you use the NTI DMS-100
(National ISDN) or NTI DMS-100
(Custom ISDN) switch type
Enter the different LDNs in the A1 and
A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending
on the number of lines you use) text
boxes. These switch types are given a
separate number for each channel.

ISDN Setup

Cancel

Open Page 2 of the ISDN Setup menu
to enter the LDN (Local Directory
Number) in the Local Number text
boxes.
When you use the AT&T 5ESS
(Multipoint Custom ISDN) or AT&T
5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom ISDN)
switch type

56

9876532

408

B2

Page: 1/7

3

408

A2
B1

AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN), NTI
DMS-100 (National ISDN): Enter
“1”.
AT&T 5ESS (Multipoint Custom
ISDN): Enter “1*10”.
AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom
ISDN): Enter “1*12”.
NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN): Enter
“1*11”.

Country/Region

Local Number

A1

Registering Local Information

Open Page 6 (SPID setup menu) to
enter the SPID.
The SPID generally comprises 12 digits,
including a 7 digit LDN (Local
Directory Number).
Be sure to enter the different SPID
number in each of the A1 and A2 (B1
and B2, C1 and C2, depending on the
number of lines you use) text boxes if
you have entered the separate LDNs in
the Local Number text boxes for each
channel in step 3.

For the AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN)
and AT&T 5ESS (Multipoint Custom
ISDN) switch type
Enter the SPID in the A1 text box only.

Multipoint Setup Menu
The Multipoint Setup menu is used when
you conduct a multipoint videoconference.

ISDN Setup

Note

Page: 6/7

The Multipoint Setup menu is available when
the System has the optional PCS-320M1 H.320
MCU or PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software
installed.

SPID
A1 019876532001
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
Cancel

Page 1/2
Multipoint Setup

For the NTI DMS-100 (National
ISDN), NTI DMS-100 (Custom
ISDN), AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN)
switch type
Enter the different SPID numbers in the
A1 and A2 text boxes.

Page: 1/2
Multipoint Mode

ISDN
Auto

Broadcast Mode

Split

Number of Lines

2B (128K)

Total LAN Bandwidth

1024 Kbps

Restrict

Auto

ISDN Setup
Save

Cancel

Page: 6/7
SPID
A1 019876543001
A2 019876544001
B1
B2
C1
C2
Save

Cancel

For the AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point
Custom ISDN) switch type
You do not need to set up the SPID, then
no entry in the A1 and A2 (B1 and B2,
C1 and C2, depending on the number of
lines you use) is required.
Note

If you use the PCS-B768 ISDN unit and
connect 4-6 ISDN lines, the D1-F2 text
boxes are shown in Page 3 and Page 7 of
the ISDN Setup menu. Fill in the boxes
following steps 3 and 4.

5

After the settings are completed,
select “Save”, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.

Multipoint Mode
Selects whether you conduct a multipoint
videoconference.
On: Always conducts a multipoint
videoconference.
Auto: Automatically shifts from a point-topoint videoconference to a multipoint
videoconference.
Note

The Multipoint Mode can be selected with the
initial Setup menu (page 73).

Broadcast Mode
Selects the broadcast mode.
Split: Displays the pictures of the terminals
connected in split windows.
Voice Activate: Detects the terminal with
the speaker with the loudest voice, and
sends the picture of that terminal to all
other terminals.
Number of Lines
Selects the ISDN channels to be used for
connecting the first remote point.
1B (64K): Connects via a 1B channel.
2B (128K): Connects via 2B channels.
4B (256K): Connects via 4B channels.
6B (384K): Connects via 6B channels.
Registering Local Information

57

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Save

Notes

• The number of ISDN channels to be used for
connecting a second remote point or more is
defined by the number of ISDN lines you are
using.
• When you are called from a remote party and
the remote party has set a lower number of
ISDN channels than that set on this terminal,
the setting on the remote party’s terminal has
priority.

Total LAN Bandwidth
Selects the total bandwidth to be used for a
multipoint videoconference via LAN.
You can select from among 384 Kbps, 512
Kbps, 768 Kbps, 1024 Kbps, 1920 Kbps and
“Other”. When “Other” is selected, a
bandwidth value between 1 and 1920 Kbps
can be entered.
Restrict
Selects the ISDN transmission rate when
dialing or answering.
Auto: Selects when connecting a remote
party via a normal ISDN line.
56K: Selects when connecting a remote
party in a region or country where the
ISDN transmission rate is 56 Kbps.
Note

The system is set to connect an ISDN line at the
transmission rate of 64 Kbps at the factory.
However, some countries such as the USA or
some regions may use the ISDN transmission
rate of 64 Kbps and 56 Kbps. You may not
communicate with such country or region with
the transmission rate of 64 Kbps. In this case,
set “Restrict” to “56K” before dialing.

Page 2/2
Multipoint Setup
Page: 2/2
Video Mode

ALL

Audio Mode

ALL

Display Terminal Name

On

Far End Camera Control

On

Reject Answer

Off

Audio Mode
Selects the audio compression format for a
multipoint conference.
ALL: Uses any audio compression format
depending on the format used on the
remote site.
G.722: Uses audio based on the G.722
standard.
G.728: Uses audio based on the G.728
standard.
G.711: Uses audio based on the G.711
standard.
Note

When the remote videoconferencing system
does not support the Audio Mode selected by
the local site, the mode automatically switches
to “G.711”.

Display Terminal Name
Selects whether you display the connected
terminal names on the monitor screen at the
time of disconnection.
On: Displays the terminal names.
Off: Does not display terminal names.
Far End Camera Control
Selects whether to enable control of each
other’s cameras from each other sites.
On: Enables control of each other’s
cameras. Normally, set to ON.
Off: Disables control of each other’s
cameras.
Reject Answer
Selects whether to disable connection to a
remote party who is calling during a
videoconference.
On: Disables connection to a remote party.
Off: Enables connection to a remote party.

Save

Cancel

Video Mode
Selects the compression format of the
pictures for a multipoint conference.

58

ALL: Uses any video compression format
depending on the format used on the
remote sites.
H.263: Uses pictures based on
Recommendation H.263.
H.261: Uses pictures based on
Recommendation H.261.
No Video: Uses audio only without pictures.

Registering Local Information

Machine Information Menu
The Machine Information menu shows the
versions of the Communication Terminal
and the connected equipment for exclusive
use, installed software versions, etc.
Machine Information
VerX.XX

ISDN UNIT Version

VerX.XX

DSB Version

VerX.XX

DSP Version

VerX.XX

Software Option

Multipoint(H.323)

Option I/F

DSB, ISDN UNIT

Host Name

PCS-1

IP Address

0.0.0.0

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-00

Serial Number

12345

End

Host Version
Displays the software version of the
Communication Terminal.
ISDN UNIT Version
Displays the version of the connected PCSB384 or PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.
DSB Version
Displays the version of the connected PCSDSB1 Data Solution Box.

Option I/F
Displays the optional connected equipment.
None: No optional equipment is connected.
ISDN UNIT: The PCS-B384 or PCS-B768
ISDN Unit is connected.
DSB: The PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box is
connected.
Whiteboard: A whiteboard is connected.
Host Name
Displays the host name.
IP Address
Displays the IP address.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number.

DSP Version
Displays the version of the built-in DSP
(Digital Signal Processor) for audio/video
codec.
Software Option
Displays the optional software installed.
None: No software is installed.
Multipoint (H.323): The PCS-323M1
H.323 MCU software (for LAN) is
installed.
Multipoint (H.320): The PCS-320M1
H.320 MCU software (for ISDN) is
installed.
Multipoint (H.320 + H.323): Both the PCS323M1 and PCS-320M1 MCU software
are installed.
SIP: The PCSA-SP1 SIP software is
installed.
Multipoint (H.323), SIP: The PCS-323M1
MCU software and PCSA-SP1 SIP
software are installed.

Registering Local Information

59

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Host Version

Multipoint (H.320), SIP: The PCS-320M1
MCU software and PCSA-SP1 SIP
software are installed.
Multipoint (H.320 + H.323), SIP: The
PCS-323M1 and PCS-320M1 MCU
software and PCSA-SP1 SIP software
are installed.

Status Menu
The Status menu shows the current status of
communication.
The ISDN Line Status, LAN Line Status or
LAN Connection Status will also be
displayed depending on the line interface
used.

Communication Status
One page for each point connected to the
system will be displayed. The connected
point is shown at the upper right corner of
the page as “Connection A (or B, C….)”.
The terminal’s name of the point is also
displayed at its side.
The items below are shown both in the
columns for “Encode” and “Decode”. The
descriptions under “Encode” show the
setting status on the local system and those
under “Decode” show the status on
receiving.
Status
Page: 1/4

Communication Status

Connection A

(Encode) (Decode)
Audio Mode G.728

G.728

Line I/F

Video Mode H.261CIF H.261CIF Camera Control

BRI
ON

Frame Rate 15fps

15fps

Data Control

Rate

2 x 64k

2 x 64k

DSB

ON

MLP Rate

OFF

OFF

Whiteboard

OFF

HMLP Rate OFF

OFF

LSD Rate

6400

6400

ON

Cancel

Audio Mode
Shows the current audio compression
format.

Rate
Displays the number of lines connected and
a transmission rate during communication.
MLP Rate
Shows the MLP (Multi Layer Protocol) rate.
HMLP Rate
Shows the HMLP (High Speed Multi Layer
Protocol) rate.
LSD Rate
Shows the LSD (Low Speed Data) rate.
Line I/F
Displays the line interface you are using.
Camera Control
Shows whether control of each other’s
camera is enabled or not.
Data Control
Shows whether the T.120 data conference is
enabled or not.
DSB
Shows whether the PCS-DSB1 Data
Solution Box is connected or not.
Whiteboard
Shows whether the mimio Xi attached to
your whiteboard is enabled or not.

ISDN Line Status
Status
Page:

2/4

ISDN Line Status
A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2

Status:
Cause Code:

Video Mode
Shows the current video compression
format.
Note

: Connected
: Call failed

End

The audio compression and video compression
formats used for communication with a remote
party may differ from the settings in this menu,
depending on the status of videoconferencing
system on the remote site.

Frame Rate
Shows the maximum frame rate of motion
pictures.

60

: No call in progress
: No network
: Call in progress

Registering Local Information

LAN Line Status

Encryption via LAN Menu

Status
Page:

LAN Line Status

3/4
LAN1

LAN2

LAN3

LAN4

LAN5

Status:
Cause Code:
: Connected
: Call failed

: No call in progress
: No network
: Call in progress

End

For details on a videoconference with the
encryption feature, see Chapter 7.
Encryption via LAN
Page: 1/1

Status
Page:

4/4

Encryption via LAN

Send

Off

Encryption Password

LAN Connection Status
Receive

Audio Bit Rate

97448 bps

96016 bps

Video Bit Rate

1622620 bps

1627056 bps

Receive Packet Loss
Audio Data

0

/

Video Data

0

/ 58085

0 %

Camera Control Data

0

/

0 %

Packet Recovery Ratio

7579

/

LAN Mode Speed : 100Mbps Duplex : Full

2

0 %

Save

Cancel

%

End

Encryption via LAN
Selects whether or not to use the encryption
feature for a videoconference.
On: Uses the encryption feature for a
videoconference.
Off: Does not use the encryption feature for
a videoconference.
Encryption Password
Enter the password required for starting a
conference with the encryption feature.
Notes

• When “Encryption via LAN” is set to “On”,
you cannot start a conference with a terminal
not equipped with the encryption feature, a
terminal with “Encryption via LAN” set to
“Off”, or a terminal with a different
encryption password. You can start a
conference without using the encryption
feature with a terminal connected via an
ISDN.
• The Encryption via LAN menu is not
available when you connect to other
terminals by LAN&ISDN cascade
connections.

Registering Local Information

61

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

LAN Connection Status

The Encryption via LAN menu is used to
conduct a videoconference using the
encryption feature. The encryption feature
enables connection to those terminals only
that have entered the preset password,
allowing you to conduct a highly
confidential conference.

SIP Setup Menu
The SIP Setup menu is used to conduct a
videoconference with an IP phone using the
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol).
For details on a videoconference using SIP,
see Chapter 9.

Registered User Name
Enter the user name for the terminal to be
registered on the SIP server.
Password
Sets the password for the terminal to be
registered on the SIP server.
Note

Note

The SIP Setup menu is available when the
system has the optional PCSA-SP1 SIP
software installed.

Page 1/3
SIP Setup
Page: 1/2
SIP Server Mode

ISDN
On

Proxy Server Address

255.255.255.0

Registrar Address

255.255.255.0

SIP Domain

Save

Cancel

SIP Server Mode
Selects whether you use a SIP server or not.
On: Enables use of the SIP server.
Off: Disables use of the SIP server.
Proxy Server Address
Enter the address of the proxy server to be
used.
Registrar Address
Enter the address of a registrar to be used.
SIP Domain
Enter the SIP domain name.

Page 2/3
SIP Setup
Page: 2/3
Registered User Name

ISDN

Password
Registered User Name

ISDN

Password
Registered User Name

ISDN

Password
Save

62

Cancel

Registering Local Information

When you conduct a multipoint
videoconference using SIP, enter the user name
and password for each terminal. Page 3/3
provides text boxes for the fourth and fifth
terminals.

The List Edit menu appears.

Registering a
Remote Party –
Phone Book

List Edit
Index
IP

IP
Line I/F:
IP
LAN Bandwidth:
1024 Kbps

Save

3

1

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Phone
Book” in the launcher menu, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
The Phone Book menu opens.
Phone Book
RECENT
Recent

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

New Entry

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “New
Entry”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

Enter the name of a remote party in the
Index text box.
For character input, see “Entering
Characters” on page 38.

4
Registering a New Remote
Party

Cancel

Select the line interface you are using
to connect to a remote party with
“Line I/F”.
IP: Connects to a videoconferencing
system on the remote site via a LAN.
ISDN: Connects to a videoconferencing
system on the remote site via an ISDN
line.
ISDN (Telephone): Connects to a
phone on the remote site via an ISDN
line for a voice meeting.
IP: Connects to multipoints for a
multipoint videoconference via LAN.
ISDN: Connects to multipoints for a
multipoint videoconference via ISDN
lines.
IP & ISDN: Connects to
multipoints for a multipoint
videoconference via LAN and ISDN.
SIP: Connects to an IP phone using SIP.
The List Edit menu switches according
to the selected line interface.
Note

The “Line I/F” options differ depending on
the software installed in the
Communication Terminal.
For a multipoint videoconference, see
chapter 8. For SIP, see chapter 9.

Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

63

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

You can register the telephone number or IP
address of a remote party in the Phone Book,
allowing you to dial the party very easily.
Up to 500 remote parties can be registered in
the Phone Book. You can also store a still
image such as a participant’s portrait in the
index list.
You can also create a Private Phone Book in
a “Memory Stick” separately from the
Phone Book in the Communication
Terminal.

5

Set up various items for the line on a
remote site.

the number of the remote party in
the A1 text box.

When “LAN” is selected in step 4

2 Select the number of the ISDN
channels to be used for dialing.

List Edit
Index

OSAKA
IP

IP
Line I/F:
IP

6

LAN Bandwidth:
1024 Kbps

Save

Select the line interface icon or a still
image stored in a “Memory Stick” to
be registered in the Phone Book.

Cancel

1 Enter the IP address of the remote
party.
Enter the host name and domain
name when using the DNS server
(ex. host.domain). When using the
gatekeeper, enter the user name and
user number registered in the LAN
Setup menu (page 50).

Press the B or b button to select the icon
or a still image, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
Note

You cannot select a still image unless a
“Memory Stick” in which the still image is
stored is inserted.

2 Select the LAN bandwidth to be
used.
When “ISDN” or “ISDN
(Telephone)” is selected in step 4
List Edit
Index: Bob
ISDN

A

7

Use the V, v, B or b button to select
“Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The settings are registered in the Phone
Book.

Line I/F:

ISDN
Number of Lines:

6B (384K)

Save

Cancel

1 Enter the telephone number of the
remote party in the telephone
number text box beside “A”.
When entering a sub-address,
enter an asterisk (*) between the
telephone number and subaddress. Only numerals are usable
for a sub-address.
When “More Options Enable” is
set to “On” in the Dial Setup menu
(page 43), the A1, A2, B1, B2, C1
and C2 text boxes appear. Enter

64

Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

To connect to the remote party
without using BONDING
If the videoconferencing system of the
remote party is not equipped with the
BONDING function, entering one telephone
number does not allow you to connect all the
line numbers used to connect to the remote
party. To connect to the remote party by
entering all the ISDN line numbers used,
you can set the connection without using the
BONDING function of this system.
Set “More Options Enable” to “On” in the
Dial Setup menu (page 43), select the More
Options button at the lower part of the List
Edit menu to open the Dial Setup menu, then
set “Bonding” to “Auto”. The A1, A2, B1,
B2, C1 and C2 text boxes appear in the List
Edit menu. Enter all the telephone numbers
for the ISDN lines selected by “Number of

Lines”. Up to 6B-channel connection is
available when using this method.
Note

When you set “Number of Lines” to “2B”, you
can connect to the remote party by selecting
“ISDN (2B)” from “Line I/F” in the Dial menu.

To set up more detailed options

You can change the telephone number, IP
address, name or setting registered in the
Phone Book.

1

Open the Phone Book menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select the
remote party to be changed in the
Phone Book menu, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Dial
Edit

Note

Copy

The contents set with the More Options button
have priority over those set in the Dial Setup
menu.

Delete

3

Press the V or v button on the Remote
Commander to select “Edit”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
The List Edit menu appears.

4

Change the telephone number, IP
address, name or setting.

5

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Comander to select “Save”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The correction is completed.

Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

65

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

When “More Options Enable” is set to “On”
in the Dial Setup menu, the More Options
button is shown at the lower part of the List
Edit menu.
Select the More Options button with the V,
v, B or b button on the Remote Commander
and press the PUSH ENTER button to open
the Dial Setup menu. You can change the
settings of the desired items.

Changing the Contents of the
Phone Book

Deleting the Registered
Remote Party
Follow the procedure below to delete the
remote party from the Phone Book.

1

Open the Phone Book menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select the
remote party to be deleted in the
Phone Book menu, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.
The submenu appears.

3

Copying the Setting of the
Phone Book Menu

1

Open the Phone Book menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select the
remote party to be copied in the Phone
Book menu, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The submenu appears.

3

Press the V or v button on the Remote
Commander to select “Delete”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.

The items for the selected party are
copied, and the file name is followed by
“–2”. You can use the setting after
modifying the necessary items.

The message “Delete Entry?” appears.

4

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “OK”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.

Press the V or v button on the Remote
Commander to select “Copy”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.

Creating a Private Phone
Book

The selected party is deleted.
To cancel deleting
Select “Cancel” in step 4, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.

You can create your own Phone Book
(Private Phone Book) in a “Memory Stick”.
Once the Private Phone Book is registered,
inserting the “Memory Stick” into the
Communication Terminal changes the
Phone Book menu to the Private Phone
Book menu. You can also activate the Auto
Dial feature, allowing you to start dialing
automatically to one of the lists simply by
inserting the “Memory Stick”.

To register a new remote party in a
Private Phone Book

1

Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you
want to register a remote party into the
Memory Stick slot on the
Communication Terminal.
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the
direction of the arrow with the mark
facing upward.

66

Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Open the Private Phone Book menu and
proceed with the steps described on pages 65
and 66.

To copy all the contents of the
Phone Book to the Private Phone
Book

2

Open Page 2 of the Administrator
Setup menu.

Save Phone Book
Load Phone Book
Auto Dialing

On

To delete the Private Phone Book
from the “Memory Stick”

Create Private Phone Book
Delete Private Phone Book
Copy to Private Phone Book
Save

Cancel

For how to open the menu, see “Registering
Local Information” on page 39.

3

Select “Create Private Phone Book”.
An empty folder and file for a Private
Phone Book are created in the “Memory
Stick”. The Private Phone Book menu
appears.
Private Phone Book
Recent

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

New Entry

4

Register a new remote party.
The procedure is the same as that for
registering in the Phone Book. Proceed
with steps 2 to 7 in “Registering a New
Remote Party” on page 63.

Insert the “Memory Stick” from which you
want to delete the registered Private Phone
Book into the Memory Stick slot on the
Communication Terminal, then select
“Delete Private Phone Book” from Page 2 of
the Administrator Setup menu. All the data
are deleted from the inserted “Memory
Stick”.

To dial a specified list of the Private
Phone Book automatically
If you set “Auto Dial” in the Administrator
Setup menu to “On”, you can automatically
dial one of the lists registered in the Private
Phone Book simply by inserting the
“Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone
Book is registered.

1

Open the Private Phone Book.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select the
remote party to dial automatically,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.

The procedures for how to change the
contents of the Private Phone Book, how to
delete the registered remote party, or how to
copy the setting of the Private Phone Book
are the same as those for the Phone Book.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

67

Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators

Administrator Setup
Page: 2/2

Insert the “Memory Stick” in which you
want to store the Private Phone Book into
the Memory Stick slot on the
Communication Terminal, then select
“Copy to Private Phone Book” from Page 2
of the Administrator Setup menu. All the
data registered in the Phone Book are copied
to the inserted “Memory Stick”.

3

Press the V or v button on the Remote
Commander to select “Edit”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
The List Edit menu appears.
List Edit
ALPHA

Index OSAKA

IP

IP 1 2 3 . 1 2 3 . 1 2 3 . 1 2 3
Line I/F
IP
LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps
Auto Dial
Off

Save

Cancel

4

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Auto
Dial”, press the PUSH ENTER button,
then select “On” from the drop-down
list.

5

Use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The setting is registered and “AUTO”
appears on the registered list.
Private Phone Book
RECENT
AUTO

Recent

IP

Anne

Jane

Mary

0-9
A-I

Anne
0.0.0.0

J-S
T-Z

New Entry

To exit from the Private Phone
Book menu
Remove the “Memory Stick” in which the
Private Phone Book is registered from the
Communication Terminal. The screen
returns to the Phone Book menu.

68

Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book

Chapter 3: Daily
Videoconference
This chapter describes how to conduct a videoconference from start to finish
after the administrator has completed various registrations and settings for the
system.
The videoconference explained here is a point-to-point conference via a LAN
connection or ISDN connection using the optional PCS-B384 or PCS-B768
ISDN Unit.
For use of a “Memory Stick” or optional equipment, see Chapter 4.

To conduct an encrypted conference via LAN, see Chapter 7.
To conduct a multipoint conference, see Chapter 8.
To conduct a videoconference using SIP, see Chapter 9.

Starting a Conference by Calling a
Remote Party
You can start a videoconference with a remote party by dialing. Once you have
made a connection to the remote party, you can begin talking just as with a
normal phone call and start a videoconference.

Turning on the Power

1

Turn on the TV monitor.
When the IR repeater is inserted under the remote sensor of the Sony TV, set
the TV to standby mode. When the power of the Communication Terminal is
turned on, the TV monitor will turn on simultaneously.

2

Turn on other equipment you are using for the videoconference.

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

69

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

To conduct a data conference using the optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution
Box, see Chapter 5.

3

Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
on (@).
The Communication Terminal turns on after a while.

POWER indicators (Lights in green.)

Power switch

Three indicators on the front of the Communication Terminal and the POWER
indicator on the camera light, then only the POWER indicators on both units
remain on in green. The launcher menu will appear on the monitor screen and
the picture shot by the local camera will also appear in the launcher menu.
Note

After the power is turned on, the camera moves automatically for trial operation. Be
careful not to catch your finger.

Using the Launcher Menu
The launcher menu is displayed on the monitor screen when the system is
turned on or while it is not connected to a remote party. The launcher menu
displays the image shot by the local camera, local system status and buttons to
open the menus.

Connect
Phone Book
Dial

Menu

Angle Adj.

Press to show help

IP:0.0.0.0
Video:Main

ISDN:012345678912
Audio:MIC(INT)+AUX

1 Screen
The image shot by the local camera is displayed.

70

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

2 System indicators
The indicators show the current status of the local camera by the icons or letters
listed below.
Indicator Identificati Description
(icon)
on
LAN
status

The indicator is shown in dark when the LAN is enabled
to use, and in light when it is disabled.

Multipoint Multipoint mode is activated.
mode
Memory
Stick

“Memory Stick” is inserted.

ISDN
status

When the optional ISDN Unit is connected, usable ISDN
port is shown.

IP address

Shows the IP address of the local system.

ISDN:

ISDN
telephone
number

Shows the ISDN telephone number of the local system.

Video:

Video
input

The selected video input on the local system is shown.
Main: Picture shot by the Camera Unit.
Object: Picture shot by the optional PCS-DS150/
DS150P Document Stand.
AUX1: Picture output from equipment connected to the
VIDEO IN AUX 1 connector.
AUX2: Picture output from equipment connected to the
VIDEO IN AUX 2 connector.
Note

The video inputs are shown as the labels set in the
General Setup menu (page 47).

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

71

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

IP:

Indicator Identificati Description
(icon)
on
Audio:

3

Audio
input

The selected audio input on the local system is shown.
MIC (INT): Sound from the built-in microphone.
MIC (EXT): Sound from an external microphone
connected to the Communication Terminal.
MIC (DSB): Sound from an external microphone
connected to the optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution
Box.
MIC (AUX): Sound from an external microphone
connected to the AUX IN jack on the optional PCSDSB1 Data Solution Box.
AUX: Sound from external equipment connected to the
AUDIO IN jack on the Communication Terminal.
MIC (INT)+AUX: Mixed sounds from the built-in
microphone and from external equipment
MIC (EXT)+AUX: Mixed sounds from an external
microphone connected to the Communication
Terminal and from external equipment.
MIC (DSB)+AUX: Mixed sounds from an external
microphone connected to the optional PCS-DSB1
Data Solution Box and from external equipment.
MIC (AUX)+AUX: Mixed sounds from an external
microphone connected to the AUX IN jack on the
optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box and from
external equipment.
CTE(AUX): Sound from the CTE-600 Communication
Transducer connected to the AUDIO IN jack on the
Communication Terminal.
CTE(DSB): Sound from the CTE-600 Communication
Transducer connected to the AUX IN jack on the
optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box.

Phone Book button
The Phone Book menu is displayed when you select this button by pressing the
V, v, B or b button and then the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote
Commander.

4

Dial button
The Dial menu is displayed when you select this button by pressing the V, v,
B or b button and then the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

5

Menu button
You can display the various Setup menus when you select this button by
pressing the V, v, B or b button and then the PUSH ENTER button on the
Remote Commander.

6 Press to show help
When you press the HELP button on the Remote Commander if “Press to show
help” is displayed, the guide of each menu appears on the screen. Pressing the
HELP button again hides the help guide.

72

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

Selecting the Video/Audio Quality Mode
You can select whether priority for video/audio quality is given to still picture,
motion picture or sound.

1

Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Menu”
on the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button. You can also
display the menu by pressing the MENU button on the Remote
Commander.
The Setup menu appears.
Setup

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Save

2

Cancel

Press the b button on the Remote Commander to select “Video/Audio”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The setting items appear.
Setup

Video/Audio
Multipoint Mode

Sound Priority
Picture Priority
Off

Motion Priority
More Options

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.

Save

3

Cancel

Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select the desired
mode, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Sound Priority: Select to prefer the sound quality.
Picture Priority: Select to prefer the picture quality
Motion Priority: Select to give the top priority to motion picture.
More Options: Select to use the settings in the More Options menu (page 65).

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

73

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.

4

Press the v button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press
the PUSH ENTER button.
Setup

Video/Audio

Picture Priority

Multipoint Mode

Auto

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.

Save

Cancel

The settings are saved and the screen returns to the launcher menu.

Calling a Remote Party
To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book

1

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/
DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote Commander.
The Dial menu appears on the screen.
Dial

Line I/F

IP

IP

A2
LAN Bandwidth

B1

1024 Kbps

B2
C1
C2

More Options

Dial

Save

Note

Pressing the number buttons on the Remote Commander opens the Dial menu,
allowing direct entry of the IP address or the ISDN telephone number with the
number buttons.

74

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Line I/F”, then press the PUSH
ENTER button. The submenu appears. Press the V or v button to select the
line interface used to connect to the remote party, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
Dial

Line I/F

IP

LAN
IP
ISDN
LAN Bandwidth:
ISDN (2B)
1024 Kbps
ISDN(Telephone)

A2
B1
B2

More Options

Dial

Save

3

Configure the LAN, or ISDN line.
When using the LAN
Dial

Line I/F

IP

IP

A2
LAN Bandwidth

B1

1024 Kbps

B2

More Options

Dial

Save

1 Enter the IP address of a remote party to connect in the IP text box.
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the IP text
box, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Then enter the IP address with
the number buttons on the Remote Commander. Enter the host name and
domain name when using the DNS server in the IP text box (ex.
host.domain). When using the gatekeeper, enter the user name and user
number registered in the LAN Setup menu (page 50).
Notes

• You can enter a dot ( . ) with the b or
button on the Remote
Commander.
• To correct the entered number, press the PinP (BACK SPACE) button on the
Remote Commander. The last entered number is deleted.

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

75

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

IP: Connects to the videoconferencing system of a remote party via a LAN.
ISDN: Connects to the videoconferencing system of a remote party via an
ISDN.
ISDN (2B): Connects to the H.221-format videoconferencing system via 2B
channels of the ISDN connection.
ISDN (Telephone): Connects to the phone of a remote party to conduct a voice
meeting via the ISDN connection.

• To delete the entered IP address, press the DISPLAY (CLEAR) button on the
Remote Commander.

2 Select the LAN bandwidth.
Use the V, v, B or b button to select “LAN Bandwidth”, then press the
PUSH ENTER button. Press the V or v button to select the bandwidth from
the displayed submenu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
You can choose from among 64 Kbps, 128 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 512
Kbps, 768 Kbps, 1024 Kbps, 1920 Kbps and Other.
When using the ISDN
Dial

Line I/F

A

ISDN
Number of Lines
6 B (384K)

More Options

Dial

Save

1 Enter the telephone number of a remote party to connect to in the A text
box.
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the A text
box, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Then enter the telephone number
with the number buttons on the Remote Commander.
Notes

• Do not enter the prefix number in the telephone number text box.
• Even when you connect multiple ISDN lines (2B or more number of lines),
entering one telephone number of the remote party enables you to connect all the
lines used automatically.
• When you select ISDN (2B (128K)), the A1 and A2 text boxes appear. You can
enter a separate ISDN line number in each text box. When you enter the number
in the A2 text box, pressing the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander
enables copy of the content of the A1 text box to A2.
• To correct the entered number, press the PinP (BACK SPACE) button on the
Remote Commander. The last entered number is deleted.
• To delete the entered ISDN telephone number, press the DISPLAY (CLEAR)
button on the Remote Commander.

2 Select the number of channels connected when setting up a call.
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Number
of Lines”, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Press the V or v button to
select the number of channels to be used when calling a remote party from
the displayed submenu, then press the PUSH ENTER button. You can
select from among 1B(64K), 2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K), 5B(320K),
6B(384K), 8B(512K) and 12B(768K) channels.

76

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

Note

To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers for the
ISDN lines used
If the videoconferencing system of the remote party is not equipped with the
BONDING function, entering one remote party’s telephone number does not allow
automatic connection of multiple ISDN lines used to connect to the remote party.
To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers, register the
remote party’s telephone numbers for the ISDN lines to be used referring to
“Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” in Chapter 2 (page 63), then connect
to the remote party according to the procedure described in “To call a remote party
registered in the Phone Book” (page 78).

4

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Dial” in the lower part of the menu,
then press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/
DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote Commander.

Picture on the local site

Picture on the remote site

Meeting starts!

To cancel dialing before connecting
Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button.
To save the entered IP address or ISDN line number in the Phone
Book
Select “Save” with the V, v, B or b button, then press the PUSH ENTER
button on the Remote Commander. The address or number you entered is
saved in the Phone Book and the List Edit menu is displayed.
For details on the List Edit menu, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone
Book” on page 63.

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

77

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

The system begins dialing the IP address or ISDN telephone number entered
in step 3. “Dialing (IP)” or “Dialing (ISDN)” appears on the monitor screen,
and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the Communication Terminal blinks.
When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Meeting starts!”
appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and lights in
blue.
Now you can start a videoconference.

Redial function
Once you have input the IP address or ISDN line number using the Dial menu,
it will be entered in the text box of the Dial menu the next time you open the
menu.
Notes

The redial function is not available:
– Once you have turned off the power of the system or set it to standby mode.
– When you cancel dialing the entered IP address or ISDN telephone number.
– When you open the Dial menu by pressing the number buttons on the Remote
Commander.

To set up more detailed options
When “More Options Enable” is set to “On” in the Dial Setup menu, the More
Options button is shown at the lower part of the Dial menu.
Select the More Options button with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote
Commander and press the PUSH ENTER button to open the Dial Setup menu. You
can change the settings of the desired items.

To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book

1

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Phone
Book” in the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The Phone Book menu appears on the monitor screen.
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I

TOKYO
0.0.0.0

J-S
T-Z

IP

ISDN

ISDN

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS
New Entry

78

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote
party from the Phone Book, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

IP

ISDN

ISDN

Dial

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS

PARIS
1234567

Edit
New Entry
Copy
Delete

3

Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT
(
/ ) button on the Remote Commander.
The system begins dialing the party selected in step 2. “Dialing (IP)” or
“Dialing (ISDN)” appears on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator
(blue) on the Communication Terminal blinks.
When the System connects to the system on the remote site, the message
“Meeting starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops
blinking and lights in blue.
Now you can start the videoconference.
Picture on the local site

Picture on the remote site

Meeting starts!

To cancel dialing before connecting
Press the V, v, B or b button to select “Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the
Remote Commander.

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

79

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

If the desired remote party does not appear, see “To search for a remote
party in the Phone Book” on page 81.

To call a remote party registered in the Private Phone Book

1

Insert a “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is registered into
the Memory Stick slot on the Communication Terminal.
The Phone Book menu changes to the Private Phone Book menu.
Private Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

Anne

Jane

Mary

0-9
A-I

Anne
0.0.0.0

J-S
T-Z

New Entry

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote
party you want to call from the Private Phone Book, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.

3

Select “Dial” from the submenu and press the PUSH ENTER button, or
press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote
Commander.
The system dials the selected remote party.

Note

If the auto dialing feature of the Private Phone Book is activated, the system begins
dialing when the “Memory Stick” is inserted.

80

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

To search for a remote party in the Phone Book
The Phone Book displays the list of the six parties at a time.
When you select “Recent”, the Phone Book lists the six names you have most
recently dialed.
Selecting the “0-9”, “A-I”, “J-S” or “T-Z” tab opens the submenu. When you
select the desired number or letter from the corresponding submenu, the Phone
Book lists the six party names which start with the selected number or letter.
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

0

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9

1

A-I

2

J-S

3
4

T-Z
ISDN

ISDN

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS

5
6
7

New Entry 8
9

Note

You can also search for remote parties by pressing the number buttons on the Remote
Commander instead of the “0-9” tab on the Phone Book. Pressing the number button
lists the six party names which start with the alphabetical letter on the number button of
the Remote Commander.

Starting a Conference by Calling a Remote Party

81

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

IP

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
Operations for answering a call differ depending on the setting of the answer
mode.
Auto answer mode
The system automatically receives a call from a remote party and you can start
conferencing. Although no operation is necessary to start, the picture on the
local site will be displayed on the remote site screen even if you are not ready
to begin.
Manual answer mode
When there is an incoming call, the Communication Terminal rings. You need
to connect the call manually before starting the conference.
You can start it whenever you are ready.
Notes

• You cannot answer the call unless the power switch on the Communication Terminal
is set to on (@).
• Make sure that the TV monitor is turned on. If you insert the IR repeater under the
remote sensor on the Sony TV, set the TV to standby mode.

For setting of the answer mode, see “Auto Answer” in the Answer Setup menu
on page 43.

Answering a Call from a Remote Party
To answer a call in auto answer mode
When you receive a call, the Communication Terminal rings and the message
“Incoming Call” appears on the monitor screen. The system is automatically
connected and the picture of the remote party is displayed on the local monitor
screen and the sound is heard. The picture and sound on the local site will be
enabled on the remote site at the same time.
The message “Meeting starts!” appears on the monitor screen.
You are now ready to start a conference.
Picture on the local site

Picture on the remote site

Meeting starts!

82

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party

Note

See pages 85 to 98 to adjust the sound and picture during the conference.

To receive a call in manual answer mode
When you receive a call, the Communication Terminal rings and the message
“Incoming call. Answer?” appears on the monitor screen.
Press B or b to select “OK”, then press the PUSH ENTER button. The system
is then connected. Once the connection is made, the picture of the remote party
is displayed on the local monitor screen and the sound is heard. The picture and
sound on the local site will be enabled on the remote site at the same time.
The message “Meeting starts!” appears on the monitor screen.
You are now ready to start a conference.
Note

When you do not want to answer the call
Press B or b to select “Cancel”, then press the PUSH ENTER button. Ringing
stops.
When the system fails to make an ISDN connection
If the system fails to connect to the remote party, the message “Cannot
complete connection (an ISDN cause code and a message are displayed here)”
appears on the monitor screen.
For details on ISDN cause codes and messages, see “On Screen Messages”
on page 202.
When there is an incoming call during communication over a different line
interface
If you receive a call via an ISDN when you are in communication via a LAN
(or vice versa), the system becomes busy.
To display an elapsed communication time
You can display an elapsed communication time on the monitor screen if
“Time Display” in the General Setup menu is set to “On”.
To turn the indicator off, set “Time Display” in the General Setup menu to
“Off”. You can also turn off the indicator by selecting “Icon display OFF” in
the communication submenu during communication with a remote party.
For “Time Display” setting, see “General Setup Menu” on page 46.

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party

83

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

See pages 85 to 98 to adjust the sound and picture during the conference.

Ending the Conference

1

Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
Commander.

/

) button on the Remote

The message “Disconnect?” appears on the monitor screen.

2

Press the B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT
(
/ ) button on the Remote Commander again.
The system is disconnected.
Note

The power of the Communication Terminal remains on even if the system is
disconnected.

To cancel disconnection of the system
Select “Cancel” with the B or b button, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
To register the connected remote party in the Phone Book
You can easily register the remote party who has just disconnected.
If you set “Last Number Registration” in the General Setup menu to “On”, the
message “Register this participant in the list?” appears after a conference with
an unregistered remote party is finished. When you select “OK”, the Edit List
menu appears.
Note

If the “Last Number Registration” is set to “Off”, the message does not appear.

For “Last Number Registration” setting, see “Last Number Registration” on
page 46.

84

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party

Adjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Volume
You can adjust the volume of the sound to be received from a remote party.
Press the VOLUME + button on the Remote Commander to increase the
volume, VOLUME – button to decrease it. The volume level indicator appears
on the monitor screen. The indicator will automatically disappear if you do not
operate the buttons for a certain time.

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

Notes

• You need to set the volume of the TV monitor to an appropriate level first.
• If feedback caused by increasing the volume occurs, decrease the volume.

Cutting Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function
You can momentarily cut off the sound to be sent to the remote party.
Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.
The sound of the local party is not heard by the remote party. The “MIC OFF”
indicator appears on the monitor screen.

MIC
OFF

To restore the sound
Press the MIC ON/OFF button again.
The “MIC OFF” indicator disappears and the sound is heard by the remote
party.

Adjusting the Sound

85

Cutting Off the Sound On Answering – Mic on Answer Function
You can cut off the sound to be sent to a remote party when you have answered
a call from the remote party.
If you set “Mic on Answer” to “Off” in the Answer Setup menu, only the
picture on the local party will be sent to the remote party when answering a
call. The “MIC OFF” indicator appears on the monitor screen.
To send the sound to the remote party
Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.

Synchronizing Audio and Video – Lip Sync Function
During the conference a time lag may occur between the sound and picture to
be sent to the remote party.
When you set “Lip Sync” to “On” in the Audio Setup menu, the system adjusts
to synchronize audio and video. However, this may delay transmission of
audio synchronized with video.
For the Lip Sync setting, see “Audio Setup Menu” on page 48.
Note

To enable the Lip Sync function of the remote party, you have to ask them to do so.

Reducing Echo – Echo Canceler
The Communication Terminal is equipped with the Echo Canceler, allowing
the echo that occurs during audio transmission to be reduced.
Setting “Echo Canceler” to “Internal” in the Audio Setup menu activates the
built-in echo canceler. If you set it to “External”, you can activate the eco
canceler of the equipment connected to the system.
For the “Echo Canceler” setting, see “Audio Setup Menu” on page 48.

86

Adjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Camera
You can adjust the image shot by the local camera that is sent to the remote
party to obtain the desired angle and size.
During communication you can also control the camera on the remote site to
adjust the image shot by the remote camera.

Selecting the Camera to be Controlled
Before adjustment, choose whether you control the local or remote camera.

1

Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.
The Display Control menu appears.

Press the B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Control”,
then switch between “Far” and “Near” with the V or v button.
Display Control

3

Display

Control

Far

Near
Camera

Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
When “Far” is selected (the remote camera is selected), the FAR indicator is
displayed.
When “Near” is selected (the local camera is selected), the FAR indicator does
not appear.
Notes

• You cannot control the remote camera unless “Far End Camera Control” is set to
“On” in the Dial Setup menu at a dialing party and the same item in the Answer
Setup menu is set to “On” at an answering party.
• You cannot control the remote camera during a session if the remote control
format of the remote camera is not H.281. If you cannot control the remote
camera, ask the remote party about the remote control format of his camera.
• If the local and remote parties try to control the same camera at the same time, the
camera may not operate correctly.

Adjusting the Camera

87

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

2

Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom
Determine the angle of view and the size of the picture to be displayed on the
monitor screen by adjusting the angle and zoom.
You can make adjustments in the monitor screen during communication and
in the launcher menu when not in communication. You can also make
adjustments using the Camera menu.
To make adjustment during communication

1

Select the camera you want to adjust.
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display
Control menu, then select “Far” or “Near” under “Control”.

2

Press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle.
The picture whose camera angle is adjusted is displayed in the small window
or in full screen.
Adjusted picture

3

Use the ZOOM button to zoom in or out.
Press the ZOOM T (Telephoto) button to zoom in (to enlarge image), and the
ZOOM W (Wide angle) button to zoom out (to obtain wider range of image).

To make adjustment using the launcher menu while not in communication
You can adjust the camera angle and zoom of the picture on the local site only.

1

88

Use the V, v, B or b button to select the screen (screen frame becomes
yellow), then press the PUSH ENTER button.

Adjusting the Camera

The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle
and zoom.

Connect
Phone Book
Dial

Menu
Press to show help

Angle Adj.
Press the
or button on the Remote
Commander to adjust the camera angle.
Use the ZOOM buttons to zoom in and out.
IP:0.0.0.0
ISDN:012345678912
Press the PUSH ENTER button to return to the
Video:Main
Audio:MIC(INT)+AUX
previous
screen.

Press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle so that the desired
angle of view is obtained.

3

Use the ZOOM button to zoom in or out.
Press the ZOOM T button to zoom in (to enlarge image), and the ZOOM W
button to zoom out (to obtain wider range of image).

4

Press the PUSH ENTER button.

To make adjustment using the Camera menu

1

Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup
menu, then press the V or v button to select
(camera) icon.
The Camera menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Adjustments”, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle
and zoom.
Camera
Preset Save
Preset Load
Adjustments

Use the following Remote Commander buttons to
adjust the camera.
: Auto adjustment On.
: Focus+.
: Focus: Brightness.
: Backlight On/Off.

3

While in communication, press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote
Commander to select the camera to be adjusted.
When the remote camera is selected, the FAR indicator is displayed.
Adjusting the Camera

89

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

2

4

Press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle so that the desired
angle of view is obtained.

5

Use the ZOOM button to zoom in or out.
Press the ZOOM T button to zoom in (to enlarge image), and the ZOOM W
button to zoom out (to obtain wider range of image).

6

Press the PUSH ENTER button.

Adjusting the Focus and Brightness
Normally, the focus and brightness are automatically adjusted to obtain
optimum levels. You can also adjust them manually.
It is recommended that the focus and brightness be adjusted automatically.
To set the system to camera adjustment mode

1

Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup
menu, then press the V or v button to select the
(camera) icon.
The Camera menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Adjustments”, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle
and zoom.
The guidance for operations will be displayed under the screen.
Camera
Preset Save
Preset Load
Adjustments

Use the following Remote Commander buttons to
adjust the camera.
: Auto adjustment On.
: Focus+.
: Focus: Brightness.
: Backlight On/Off.

3

While in communication, press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote
Commander to select the camera to be adjusted.
When the remote camera is selected, the FAR indicator is displayed.
Note

When the remote camera is selected, only manual focus adjustment is available.

90

Adjusting the Camera

To display the picture to fill the monitor screen
To display the picture in full screen while the Camera menu is displayed, select
“Adjustments”, then press the PinP button on the Remote Commander. To
cancel the full screen mode, press the RETURN button or PinP button on the
Remote Commander.
To adjust the focus automatically
Press the number button 0 on the Remote Commander.
The “Auto Camera” indicator appears and the focus and brightness are
automatically adjusted.
To adjust the focus manually

To adjust the brightness
Press the number button 9 on the Remote Commander repeatedly to make the
picture brighter. The “Brightness +” indicator is displayed.
Press the “7” button on the Remote Commander repeatedly to make the picture
darker. The “Brightness –” indicator is displayed.
To shoot the picture with backlight compensation
Use backlight compensation when shooting a subject with bright background.
Each time you press the number button 8, the backlight compensation is
activated or deactivated. When it is activated, the “Backlight On” indicator is
displayed. When it is deactivated, the “Backlight Off” indicator is displayed.

Presetting the Angle and Zoom Settings
Up to six settings for camera angle and zoom can be registered in the preset
memory. Once you have stored the settings, you can easily recall them to move
the camera.
You can preset the settings in the monitor screen while in communication, and
in the launcher menu while not in communication. You can also do so using
the Camera menu.
To preset the setting in the monitor screen while in communication

1

Select the camera whose camera angle and zoom setting you want to
preset.
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display
Control menu, then select “Far” or “Near” under “Control”.
Adjusting the Camera

91

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

Press the
button on the Remote Commander repeatedly to move the focus
point further away from the camera. The “Focus Far” indicator is displayed.
Press the
button on the Remote Commander repeatedly to move the focus
point closer to the camera. The “Focus Near” indicator is displayed.

2

Adjust the camera angle and zoom.
Use the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle, and ZOOM button to
adjust the zoom.

3

Keep one of the number buttons 1–6 pressed.
The angle and zoom setting is stored in the selected number button, and the
message “Registered to Preset number 1 (–6).” appears.

To preset the setting in the launcher menu while not in communication

1

Adjust the camera angle and zoom in the launcher menu.
Use the V, v, B or b button to select the screen and press the PUSH ENTER
button, then press the V, v, B or b button to adjust the angle and the ZOOM
buttons to adjust the zoom.

2

Keep one of the number buttons 1–6 pressed.
The angle and zoom setting is stored in the selected number button, and the
message “Registered to Preset number 1 (–6).” appears.

To preset the setting using the Camera menu

1

Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup
menu, then press the V or v button to select
(camera) icon.
The Camera menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset
Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.

3

Select the preset number (1–6) with the V or v button, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The color of the screen frame changes, then you can adjust the camera angle
and zoom.
Camera
Preset Save

1

Preset Load

2

Adjustments

3
4
5
6

4

92

While in communication, select the camera to be adjusted with the FAR/
NEAR button on the Remote Commander.

Adjusting the Camera

The FAR indicator is displayed on the monitor screen when the remote camera
is selected.

5

Adjust the angle and zoom.
Use the V, v, B or b button to adjust the camera angle, and ZOOM button to
adjust the zoom.

6

Press the PUSH ENTER button.
The setting is registered in the selected preset number.

Recalling the Preset Angle and Zoom Setting

To recall the preset setting in the monitor screen while in communication

1

Select the camera which you want to move to the preset position.
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display
Control menu, then select “Far” or “Near” under “Control”.

2

Press one of the number buttons 1–6 on the Remote Commander.
The setting of the selected preset number is recalled, and the camera moves to
the preset position. The message “Preset 1 (-6) selected” appears.

To recall the preset setting in the launcher menu while not in
communication
You can move the local camera to the preset position.

1

Select the screen in the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

2

Press one of the number buttons 1–6 on the Remote Commander.
The setting of the selected preset number is recalled, and the camera moves to
the preset position. The message “Preset 1 (-6) selected” appears.

To recall the preset setting in the Camera menu

1

Display the Camera menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset
Load”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.

Adjusting the Camera

93

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

You can move the camera to the preset position by recalling the preset camera
angle and zoom with the monitor screen displayed while in communication.
You can do the same with the launcher menu displayed while not in
communication. Using the Camera menu also enables movement of the
camera to the preset position.

3

Press the V or v button to select the preset number (1-6) you want to recall,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Camera
Preset Save

1

Preset Load

2

Adjustments

3
4
5
6
Use the following Remote Commander buttons to
adjust the camera.
: Auto adjustment On.
: Focus+.
: Focus: Brightness.
: Backlight On/Off.

The setting of the preset number is recalled and the camera moves to the
position of that setting.

On backup
The built-in lithium battery enables retention of the memories such as preset
camera adjustments even if the Communication Terminal is turned off.
Notes

• The built-in lithium battery is kept charged as long as the system is operated. If the
system is not used for a long time, the battery is gradually discharged. It will be
completely discharged when you do not use the system for 12 weeks. To retain the
memories, recharge the battery.
• To recharge the battery, connect the camera to the Communication Terminal and
leave both units with the powers on for about 48 hours.

94

Adjusting the Camera

Selecting the Input Picture and Sound
This section describes how to switch the picture displayed on the monitor
screen, and how to switch the input picture and sound.

Switching the Displayed Picture Between the Local and Remote
Pictures

1

Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.
The Display Control menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Near” or
“Far” under “Display”.
Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

Display Control

3

Display

Control

Far

Near
Camera

Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

Selecting the Input Picture

1

Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button on the Remote Commander.
The Video Input Select menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the video
input on the local site.

Selecting the Input Picture and Sound

95

Note

While in communication you can switch the video input of the remote system by
selecting “Far” in the Video Input Select menu.
Video Input Select
Near

Far

DSB Input

Main

Main

RGB A

Main: Select the picture shot by the Camera.
Object: Select the picture from the optional PCS-DS150/DS150P Document
Stand.
AUX 1: Selects the picture from the equipment connected to the VIDEO IN
AUX 1 connector.
AUX 2: Select the picture from the equipment connected to the VIDEO IN
AUX 2 connector.
VCR: Select the picture input from the VCR connected to the system on the
remote site. This item does not appear unless the remote system is equipped
with the video input select function.

For information on the DSB input mode, see “To select a picture from a
computer connected to the Data Solution Box” on page 136.

3

Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

To change the video input name displayed in the Video Input Select menu
If you label “Main”, “Object”, “AUX1” or “AUX2” under “Custom Input
Label” in Page 4 of the General Setup menu as a desired name, the displayed
input name in the Video Input Select menu will be changed to the label when
selecting the video input in step 2 above.
For example, you can label as Main, Document, Camera2, None.
For details on “Custom Input Label”, see “Page 4/4” in the General Setup
menu on page 47.

96

Selecting the Input Picture and Sound

Switching the Picture Displayed on the TV Monitor
Each press of the DISPLAY button on the Remote Commander switches the
picture displayed on the monitor screen as follows:

Picture shot by the local or
remote camera

DISPLAY button

Still image transmitted or
received

Chapter 3: Daily Videoconference

RGB picture

Picture on a whiteboard

Notes

• A still image is displayed only when it has been transmitted or received.
• An RGB picture from the computer connected to the optional PCS-DSB1 Data
Solution Box is displayed only when:
– the RGB signal is being transmitted or received via the Data Solution Box.
– the RGB signal is output to the monitor connected to the RGB OUT connector on
the Data Solution Box.
• A picture on a whiteboard is displayed only when notes written on a whiteboard are
transmitted or received.

For details, see “Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for
a Conference” on page 136 and “Video conference Using a Whiteboard“ on
page 144.

Switching the Sound to Be Sent to the Remote Party
You can switch the sound sent to the remote party between the sound from the
microphone and that from the connected equipment. Use “Input Select” in the
Audio Setup menu.
For details on the “Input Select” setting, see page 48.
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound

97

Monitoring the Local Picture as a
Window Picture – PinP Feature
You can display the picture shot by the local camera on your monitor screen
as a window picture (Picture-in-Picture). This function enables you to check
how your own party is monitored on the remote site.
To display the window picture
Press the PinP button on the Remote Commander.
The local picture is displayed as a window picture.
Local picture

Remote picture

To change the location of the window picture
Each press of the PinP button changes the location of the window as follows:

The window picture
disappears.

Monitor screen

Notes

• The window picture is displayed in the same location as it was last located. The
window picture is not displayed if it was not displayed last.
• The window picture is not available while not in communication with the remote
party.

To display the remote picture as a window picture
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander to open the Display
Control menu and select “Near” under “Display” when the local picture is
displayed as a window picture. The remote picture is displayed as a window
picture with the local picture as the main picture.

98

Monitoring the Local Picture as a Window Picture – PinP Feature

Chapter 4:
Videoconference
With Optional
Equipment
This chapter describes the various videoconferences using the optional
equipment in addition to the components contained in the PCS-1/1P Video
Communication System.
To conduct a data conference using the optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution
Box, see Chapter 5.
To conduct a multipoint conference, see Chapter 8.

You can display the still images stored in the optional “Memory Stick” or
transmit them to a remote party.

Displaying a Still Image Stored in a “Memory Stick”

1

Insert the “Memory Stick” containing the still images into the Memory
Stick slot on the Communication Terminal.
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark facing
upward.

Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference

99

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory
Stick” for a Videoconference

2

Open the Memory Stick menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
and select
(Memory Stick) icon with the V or v button.
Memory Stick

3

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the still
image you want to display, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Memory Stick

Save

2
Send
Load
Delete
Slide Show

4

Use the V or v button to select “Load”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The menu disappears and the selected still image is displayed on the monitor
screen.

To clear the still image from the monitor screen
While the still image is displayed, press the PUSH ENTER button on the
Remote Commander. The Memory Stick menu is restored.
Viewing a slide show
You can view still images stored in a “Memory Stick” slide by slide. (Slide
Show)

1

100

Insert the “Memory Stick” into the Memory Stick slot, and display the
Memory Stick menu.

Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a still
image from which you want to start a slide show, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Memory Stick

Save

2
Send
Load
Delete
Slide Show

3

Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Slide Show”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The slide show starts. During communication with a remote party, the still
images are transmitted to the remote party.
The
indicator is displayed on the monitor screen during the slide show.

Press the b button on the Remote Commander to advance a slide. Pressing
the B button goes back to the previous slide.

To select another still image during the slide show
Pressing the PUSH ENTER button during the slide show opens the submenu.
2/4

Stop

Press the B or b button to select the desired still image, then press the PUSH
ENTER button. The selected image is displayed in full screen. During
communication it will be transmitted to the remote party.
To stop the slide show
While the submenu is open, select “Stop” with the v button and press the
PUSH ENTER button.
While the submenu is not open, press the RETURN button on the Remote
Commander. The Memory Stick menu is restored.

Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference

101

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

4

To delete a still image
Display the Memory Stick menu, select the still image you want to delete, and
press the PUSH ENTER button. Select “Delete” from the displayed submenu
with the V or v button, then press the PUSH ENTER button. The selected still
image is deleted from the “Memory Stick”.
To remove the “Memory Stick”
Push the “Memory Stick” and release your finger. The “Memory Stick” will
come out a little, and you can then remove it.

Sending a Still Image Stored in a “Memory Stick”
While in communication, you can send still images stored in a “Memory Stick”
to the remote party.

1

Insert a “Memory Stick” into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication
Terminal, and display the Memory Stick menu.
For how to insert a “Memory Stick” and how to display the Memory Stick
menu, see “Displaying a Still Image Stored in a “Memory Stick”” on page
99.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the still
image you want to send, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Memory Stick

Save

2
Send
Load
Delete
Slide Show

3

Use the V or v button to select “Send”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The selected still image is displayed, and is sent to the remote party. The
message “The still image has been sent.” appears on the monitor screen.

When you select “Slide Show” in step 3 above
If you select “Slide Show” from the submenu and press the PUSH ENTER
button, a slide show starts from the selected still image, and it will be sent to
the remote party.

102

Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference

For details on a slide show, see page 100.
Note

The image file to be sent will be saved to the directory “\DCIM\100MSDCF”.

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Using Still Images Stored in a “Memory Stick” for a Videoconference

103

About a “Memory
Stick”
What is “Memory Stick”?
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable
and versatile IC (Integrated Circuit)
recording medium with a data capacity that
exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is
specially designed for exchanging and
sharing digital data among “Memory Stick”
compatible products. Because it is
removable, “Memory Stick” can also be
used for external data storage.
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes:
standard size and compact “Memory Stick
Duo” size. Once attached to a Memory Stick
Duo adapter, “Memory Stick Duo” turns to
the same size as standard “Memory Stick”
and thus can be used with products
compliant with standard “Memory Stick.”

Types of “Memory Stick”
There are five types of “Memory Stick”
depending on various uses.
• “Memory Stick PRO”
Equipped with MagicGate copyright
protection technology, designed for use
only with equipment compatible with
“Memory Stick PRO”.
• “Memory Stick-R”
Data stored in this type of “Memory Stick”
is not overwritten. It can be used only with
equipment compatible with “Memory
Stick-R”. Data that requires MagicGate
copyright protection technology cannot be
stored on this type.
• “Memory Stick”
Any type of data except copyrightprotected data that requires MagicGate
copyright protection technology can be
stored.
• “MagicGate Memory Stick”
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright
protection technology.
• “Memory Stick-ROM”
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data.
Recording or erasing data cannot be done
with this type.

104

About a “Memory Stick”

• “Memory Stick” (with memory select
function)
Equipped with multiple memories (128
MB). You can select the memory to use
with the memory select switch on the back
of the “Memory Stick”. You cannot use
different memories simultaneously or
continuously.

Available types of “Memory Stick”
for the unit
You can use “Memory Stick” and
“MagicGate Memory Stick” with the unit.
However, because the unit does not support
the MagicGate standards, data recorded with
the unit is not subject to MagicGate
copyright protection. Also you cannot use
“Memory Stick PRO” with this unit.

Notes on “Memory Stick Duo”
• To use “Memory Stick Duo” with this
unit, attach it to the Memory Stick Duo
adapter before inserting it into the unit.
• Be sure to attach “Memory Stick Duo” to
the adapter with the correct orientation.
• Be sure to insert the Memory Stick Duo
adapter with the correct orientation.
Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
• Do not insert the Memory Stick Duo
adapter without “Memory Stick Duo”
attached. Doing so may result in
malfunction of the unit.

What is MagicGate ?
MagicGate is copyright protection
technology that uses encryption technology.

Format that can be displayed with
this unit
The unit can display the picture files
recorded on a “Memory Stick” in the
following format:
• Image files (DCF-compatible)
compressed in the JPEG (Joint
Photographic Experts Group) format
(extension: .jpg)
• Image files of up to 2048 × 1536 pixels can
be displayed.

Before using a “Memory Stick”
Terminal
Write-protect tab

Labeling position

Notes

• Do not attach any other material than the
supplied label onto the label space.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out
beyond the labeling position.
• Do not write forcefully on the “Memory
Stick Duo” memo area.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its
case.
• Prevent metallic objects or your finger from
coming into contact with the metal parts of
the connecting section.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory
Stick.”
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory
Stick.”
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a
location that is:
– extremely hot, such as in a car parked in
the sun.
– under direct sunlight.
– very humid or subject to corrosive
substances.

• “Memory Stick PRO” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “Memory Stick R” and
are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.

Formatting a “Memory Stick”
Notes

• A “Memory Stick” formatted with a
computer cannot be guaranteed on the
Communication Terminal. Make sure to use
a “Memory Stick” that has been formatted
with the Communication Terminal.
• If you format a “Memory Stick”, all data,
including the still images and Phone Book,
will be lost.

To format a “Memory Stick”
Select “Memory Stick Format” from the
General Setup menu. The message “Format
a Memory Stick?” appears. When you select
“OK”, the “Memory Stick” will be
formatted.
If a “Memory Stick” that is not
formatted is inserted
The message “Format a Memory Stick?”
appears. To format it, select “OK”. If you do
not want to format it, select “Cancel”.

About a “Memory Stick”

105

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

• When you set the “Memory Stick” writeprotect tab to “LOCK,” data cannot be
recorded, edited, or erased.
• Use a sharp object, such as a ballpoint pen,
to move the “Memory Stick Duo” erasure
prevention switch.
• Data may be damaged if:
– You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn
off the unit while it is reading or
writing data.
– You use the “Memory Stick” in a
location subject to the effects of static
electricity or electric noise.

.....................................................................
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “Memory Stick” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• “MagicGate Memory Stick” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “Memory Stick-ROM” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.

Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images
You can send motion pictures shot by the Camera or those output from the
connected external equipment as still images.
When you are sending pictures that contain lots of text, it is recommended that
you send them as still images. The images become clearer than motion pictures
and the texts are easy to read.

Sending Still Images Using the Still Image Menu
While in communication with the remote party, you can send motion pictures
shot by the local camera as still images. You can send one still image or still
images continuously.

1

Open the Still Image menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
and select the
(still image) icon with the V or v button.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Send”
or “Continuous Send”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Still Image
Send
Continuous Send
Clear
Save
Send Object

3

Adjust the camera angle and zoom and press the PUSH ENTER button, if
necessary.
For details on the adjustments of the camera angle and zoom, see
“Adjusting the Camera Angle and Zoom” on page 88.
The motion picture displayed on the local monitor screen freezes, and a still
picture will be sent to the remote party. If you select “Send”, a still image is
sent. When transmission is finished, the message “The still image has been
sent.” appears.
When “Continuous Send” is selected, still images are sent continuously. The
sending interval depends on the transmission rate and the image type.

106

Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images

To stop “Continuous Send”
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander. Select “Stop”
from the displayed submenu with the V or v button, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
To cancel still image display
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the
submenu. Select “Clear” with the V or v button, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

Sending a Still Image Using the Communication Submenu
You can easily send only one image displayed on the monitor screen as a still
image during communication.

1

Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander during
communication.
The Communication submenu appears.
Send

Presentation

START

Whiteborad

ON

Icon Display

OFF

Reject Answer

OFF

ON

End

2

Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Send”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
The motion picture displayed on the local monitor screen freezes, and a still
picture is sent to the remote party. When transmission is finished, the message
“The still image has been sent.” appears.

To cancel still image display
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the
communication submenu. Select “Clear” with the V or v button, then press the
PUSH ENTER button. When a still image is displayed on the monitor screen,
the “Send” indication changes to “Clear”.
To erase the communication submenu
Select “End” from the menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
When you are receiving a still image
You cannot send a still image to the remote party. Select “Clear”, then send the
still image.

Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images

107

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Save

Sending Motion Pictures Output from a Document Stand as Still
Images
During communication motion pictures output from the optional PCS-DS150/
DS150P Document Stand connected to the Communication Terminal can be
frozen, and you can send a still image to the remote party.
PCS-DS150/DS150P
Document Stand (not
supplied)

To send a still image

1

Shoot the image you want to send with the Document Stand.
For details how to operate the Document Stand, refer to the Operating
Instructions supplied with the Document Stand.

2

Open the Still Image menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
then select the
(still image) icon with the V or v button.

3

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Send
Object”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The picture shot by the Document Stand is displayed on the monitor screen and
is sent to the remote party as a still image.
Still Image
Send
Continuous Send
Clear
Save
Send Object

108

Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images

Sending Motion Pictures Input from an External Camera or Other
Equipment as Still Images
During communication a motion picture output from an external camera or
VCR connected to the Communication Terminal can be frozen, and then sent
to the remote party.

External camera, VCR, etc.
AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

XXXX

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

XXXXXX

IR OUT
1

to S-video
output

to video output

to VIDEO IN
AUX1

2

to VIDEO IN
AUX2

S-video connecting cable (not supplied)

To send a still image

1

Open the Still Image menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
then select the
(still image) icon with the V or v button.

2

Display the picture you want to send on the monitor screen.
Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button on the Remote Commander to
display the Video Input Select menu, then select the input from which you want
to send a picture under “Near”, and press the PUSH ENTER button.
AUX 1: Selects the picture input from equipment connected to the VIDEO IN
AUX 1 connector.
AUX 2: Selects the picture input from equipment connected to the VIDEO IN
AUX 2 connector.
Notes

• Selecting “Object” enables you to display the picture input from the optional
PCS-DS150/DS150P Document Stand on the monitor screen.
• If you change the label of the video input using the Custom Input Label menu in
Page 4 of the General Setup menu, the labeled name is displayed instead of
“AUX1”, “AUX2” or “Object”.

3

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Send”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The motion picture on the monitor screen freezes, and a still picture is sent to
the remote party. The still picture remains even after sending.

To cancel the still image display on the answering site
Select “Clear”, or switch the input picture.
Sending Motion Pictures as Still Images

109

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Video connecting cable (not supplied)

Receiving Still Images from a Remote
Party
During communication you can receive still images of the pictures shot by the
remote camera if “Far End Camera Control” items are set to “On” both in the
Answer Setup menu on the answering site and the Dial Setup menu on the
dialing site.

1

Open the Still Image menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
then select the
(still image) icon with the V or v button.

2

Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.
The picture shot by the remote camera and the FAR indicator appear on the
monitor screen in the Still Image menu window. “Send” in the menu turns to
“Receive”.

3

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Receive”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Still Image
Receive
Continuous Send
Clear
Save
Send Object

The remote picture displayed on the monitor screen is received as a still image.

To cancel still image display
Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the
submenu. Select “Clear” with the V or v button, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

110

Receiving Still Images from a Remote Party

Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”
You can save the picture shot by the local camera or input picture from the
connected equipment or the remote picture during conference in a “Memory
Stick”.

Saving Still Images Using the Still Image Menu

1

Insert the “Memory Stick” in which you are saving the images into the
Memory Stick slot.

2

Open the Still Image menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
then select the
(still image) icon with the V or v button.

3

Display the picture you want to save on the monitor screen.

4

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Still Image
Send
Continuous Send
Clear
Save
Send Object

The picture displayed on the monitor screen will be saved as a still image to the
“Memory Stick”.
Notes

• Do not remove the “Memory Stick” until the data is completely loaded. If you do, the
“Memory Stick” may be damaged or the Communication Terminal may cause a
malfunction.
• A still image file is saved as a new file. It will not be overwritten.

Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”

111

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

To switch the input on the local site, press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button
on the Remote Commander to display the Video Input Select menu, select the
desired picture, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
To save the remote picture, switch to the picture on the remote site with the
FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander, and select the desired picture.

When the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
“LOCK” when you selected “Save” in step 4
The message “Memory Stick write-protected” appears and you cannot save the
still image file.
When the memory of the “Memory Stick” is full
The message “Memory full.” appears and you cannot save the still image file.
Image format that can be stored in a “Memory Stick”
File name
The image file is saved under the directory named “\DCIM\100MSDCF” with
a file name as “DSCXXXXX.JPG”.
Compression format
The Communication Terminal compresses and records the recorded image
data in the JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format. The file
extension is “.jpg”.
Note

The Communication Terminal is not compatible with progressive JPEG
format data.

Saving Still Images Using the Memory Stick Menu
You can save still pictures using the “Memory Stick” “Save” thumbnail
displayed on the Memory Stick menu.

1

Insert the “Memory Stick” to which you are saving the images into the
Memory Stick slot.

2

Display the picture you want to save.
To switch the input on the local site, press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button
on the Remote Commander to display the Video Input Select menu, select the
desired picture, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
To save the remote picture, switch to the picture on the remote site with the
FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander, and select the desired picture.

3

Open the Memory Stick menu.
Press the MENU button on the Remote Commander to display the Setup menu,
then select the
(“Memory Stick”) icon with the V or v button.

112

Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”

4

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to move the cursor
to the last thumbnail, the “Memory Stick” “Save” thumbnail, then press the
PUSH ENTER button.
Memory Stick

“Memory Stick” “Save”
thumbnail
Save

The selected picture is saved to the “Memory Stick” and a thumbnail is
created.

Saving Still Images Using the Communication Submenu

1

During communication with the remote party press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The communication submenu appears.
Send
Save
Presentation

START

Whiteboard

ON

Icon display

OFF

Reject Answer

OFF

ON

End

2

Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
The displayed picture is frozen and saved to the “Memory Stick” as a still
image.
After saving, the message “Still image saved to Memory Stick.” appears.

To erase the communication submenu
Select “End” in the menu, then press the PUSH ENTER button.

Saving Still Images to a “Memory Stick”

113

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

You can promptly save the picture displayed on the monitor screen during
communication to the “Memory Stick” as a still image.

Using a Convenient Menu Available
during Communication —
Communication Submenu
During communication with a remote party, pressing the PUSH ENTER
button on the Remote Commander opens the communication submenu.
The communication submenu allows you to perform operations often used
during communication only by selecting the item in the menu.
Communication submenu
Send
Save
Presentation

START

Whiteboard

ON

Icon display

OFF

Reject Answer

OFF

ON

End

Selecting each item with the V or v button and pressing the PUSH ENTER
button enables the following operations:
Send: Sends the picture displayed on the monitor screen as a still picture to a
remote party.
After it is sent, this item changes to “Clear”. Selecting this item restores the
motion picture shot by the camera.
Save: Saves the picture displayed on the monitor screen to a “Memory Stick”
as a still picture.
Presentation START: Sends the RGB picture input from the optional PCSDSB1 Data Solution Box to a remote party. After sending, the item
changes to “Presentation STOP”. Selecting the item ends transmission of
the RGB picture.
Displayed only when the Data Solution Box is connected to the
Communication Terminal.
Whiteboard ON: Sends the notes written on a whiteboard with the mimio Xi
attached. After sending, the item changes to “Whiteboard OFF”. Selecting
the item ends transmission of the notes on the whiteboard.
Displayed only when the whiteboard with the mimio Xi installed is
connected.
Icon display OFF: Selecting “Icon display OFF” hides the indicators on the
monitor screen. After selecting, the item changes to “Icon display ON”,
and selecting this item shows the indicators.
Reject Answer OFF b ON: Selecting “Reject Answer OFF b ON” rejects
incoming calls during a videoconference when the MCU software has been
installed in the Communication Terminal. After selecting, the item
changes to “Reject Answer ON b OFF”, and selecting this item allows
incoming calls.
End: Clears the communication submenu.

114

Using a Convenient Menu Available during Communication — Communication Submenu

Using Two Monitors – Dual Monitor
The Communication Terminal enables you to connect two monitors. One
monitor can be used exclusively for monitoring motion pictures. (Dual
Monitor system)
To connect the second monitor
Connect the second monitor to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR SUB or RGB
OUT connector on the Communication Terminal.
When you are using Sony monitors, insert the IR repeater under the remote
sensor of the second monitor and connect it to the IR OUT 2 jack on the
Communication Terminal.

Second monitor

First monitor

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

XXXX

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

WHITE
BOARD

DC 19.5V

XXXXXX

IR OUT
1

to VIDEO OUT
MONITOR SUB

2

to
RGB
OUT

to IR
OUT 2

Under the
remote
sensor

to S-video
input

IR repeater (supplied)
S-video connecting cable (not supplied)
Signal cable
(not supplied)
Second monitor (projector, etc.)

Activating dual monitor system
Set “Dual Monitor” to “On” in Page 1 of the General Setup menu. The default
setting is “Off” (page 45).
When set to “On”, the first monitor is used exclusively for monitoring motion
pictures while still images are displayed on the second monitor.
For details, see “Switching the Picture Displayed on Dual Monitors” on page
117.

Using Two Monitors – Dual Monitor

115

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

AUDIO OUT

(MIXED)

Notes

• When “Dual Monitor” is set to “Off”, still images will be displayed on the first
monitor screen.
• When “Dual Monitor” is set to “On”, the local picture is displayed on the second
monitor screen while not in communication.

To display the picture on the second monitor screen
Set “Sub Monitor Out” to “VIDEO OUT” or “RGB OUT” in Page 1 of the
General Setup menu. (See page 45.)
VIDEO OUT: Outputs a signal to the monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT
MONITOR SUB connector on the Communication Terminal.
RGB OUT: Outputs a signal to the monitor connected to the RGB OUT
connector on the Communication Terminal.
To view the picture as a window picture
When you press the PinP button on the Remote Commander during
communication, the picture will be displayed as a window picture on the first
monitor screen.
Note

You cannot display a window picture on the second monitor screen.

116

Using Two Monitors – Dual Monitor

Switching the Picture Displayed on Dual Monitors
You can display the following pictures on the first or second monitor while in
communication.
Second monitor

Local party
First monitor
Local party
DISPLAY button
Remote party
Still image

FAR/NEAR
button
Remote party
RGB image

Picture on a
whiteboard

First monitor
• Enables display of motion pictures on the local or remote site.
• To switch between the local and remote pictures, press the FAR/NEAR
button on the Remote Commander to display the Display Control menu, then
select “Far” (remote party) or “Near” (local party) under “Display”.
Second monitor
• Enables display of motion pictures on the local site, a still image received or
transmitted, an RGB image via the PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box or a
picture on a whiteboard.
• Each press of the DISPLAY button on the Remote Commander changes the
displayed picture.
Note

You cannot change the displayed picture by pressing the DISPLAY button if there are
no still image, RGB image, etc.

Using Two Monitors – Dual Monitor

117

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Local party

Using Multiple Microphones
The microphone built in the PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit is assumed to be used
to conduct a conference among about three participants. You can connect the
optional PCS-A1 or PCS-A300 microphone to the System, allowing more
persons to participate in the conference.
To connect the optional microphones
Connect the optional microphones to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 connectors on the
Communication Terminal. Power is supplied to the microphones from the
Terminal.

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to MIC 2

to MIC 1

PCS-A1 (not supplied) or PCS-A300 microphone
(not supplied)

To use the connected microphone
Set “Mic Select” to “External” in the Audio Setup menu. (See page 48.)
In this case the built-in microphone is disabled.
Notes on installation of the microphones
• Install microphone about 50 cm away from the participants.
• Install the speakers behind the microphones.
• Place the microphone in a quiet, echo-free location.
• Install microphones away from equipment that may cause noise.
• Avoid covering a microphone with paper, etc., or moving it. If you do either,
extreme noise and echo may be heard temporarily by the remote party. In this
case, wait until the echo disappears.

118

Using Multiple Microphones

Microphone layout examples
Microphone built in the PCS-1/1P
PCS-1/1P

PCS-A300 microphones
PCS-A300

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

PCS-1/1P

PCS-A1 microphones
PCS-A1

PCS-1/1P

Using Multiple Microphones

119

Using the Communication Transducer
(CTE)
The CTE Communication Transducer is an integrated system equipped with
uni-directional microphones and omni-directional acoustic speaker. The unit is
enabled to pick up clear voice with minimum background noise from all
directions and to emit clear sound equally in all directions.
To connect the CTE-600 Communication Transducer
CTE-600

to an input/output
connector
Interface box
(supplied with the CTE-600)
Connecting
cable
(supplied
with the
CTE-600)
to an input/output
connector

to DC 6V
to LINE
OUT

Connecting cable
(not supplied)
TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

AC adaptor (supplied
with the CTE-600 )

VISCA OUT

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
AUX

to LINE
IN

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

to AUDIO
IN

Connecting cable
(not supplied)

to a wall
outlet

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to AUDIO OUT

To use the Communication Transducer (CTE)
• Set “CTE” in the Audio Setup menu to “AUX”. (page 48)
• Set the SYSTEM SELECT switch at the bottom of the Communication
Tranceducer to “PCS”.
For detailed information on the Communication Transducer, refer to the
Operating Instructions that come with the Communication Transducer.

120

Using the Communication Transducer (CTE)

CTE layout example

PCS-1/1P

CTE-600

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Using the Communication Transducer (CTE)

121

Recording Audio During a Conference
You can record the voices of the participants on both the remote and local sites
during a conference if you connect a video cassette recorder to the AUDIO
OUT (MIXED) jack on the Communication Terminal.
This is convenient for taking minutes of the conference.
To connect a video cassette recorder

Video cassette recorder, etc.

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

to audio
input

2

to AUDIO OUT (MIXED)

Audio connecting cable (not supplied)

When recording with a video cassette recorder
When a video cassette recorder is connected to both the AUDIO IN and
AUDIO OUT (MIXED) jacks, set “Recording Mute” to “On” in the Audio
Setup menu to prevent from reflecting echo on a remote party. (See page 49.)

122

Recording Audio During a Conference

Sending Audio/Video from the External
Equipment to a Remote Party
The Communication Terminal allows you to send the picture and sound output
from the connected equipment such as a VCR to the remote party.
To connect the video equipment for input
The Communication Terminal is equipped with two video inputs.
VCR, etc.

to VIDEO IN
AUX 1

to S-video
output

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

S-video connecting cable (not supplied)
to VIDEO IN
AUX 2

to video output

to audio output

1

2

to AUDIO IN

Video connecting
cable (not supplied)

Audio connecting cable
(not supplied)

Note

Be sure to connect the audio cable to either of two VCRs.

To input audio/video from external equipment
To input video
Open the Video Input Select menu by pressing the VIDEO INPUT SELECT
button on the Remote Commander, then select the desired video input from the
“Near” text box in the menu.
To input the video from the equipment connected to the VIDEO IN AUX 1 or
2 jack, choose “AUX 1” or “AUX 2”, respectively.
To input audio
Set “Input Select” to “AUX” or “MIC + AUX” in the Audio Setup menu. (See
page 48.)
Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party

123

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

VCR, etc.

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT

When set to “AUX”, the sound from the external equipment is input and the
sound from a microphone is deactivated. When set to “MIC + AUX”, both
sounds are input.

124

Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party

Outputting Video Signals to External
Equipment
The Communication Terminal allows you to output the video signal to the
connected external equipment such as a projector and VCR.
To connect the external video equipment for output
VCR, etc.

TERMINAL

to Video
input

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

Video connecting cable
(not supplied)

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to RGB OUT

to RGB input
Signal cable (not supplied)

To output signals to the equipment connected to the RGB OUT connector
on the Communication Terminal
Set “Monitor Out” or “Sub Monitor Out” to “RGB OUT” on Page 1 of the
General Setup menu. (See page 45.)
When you are not using any other monitor than the equipment connected to the
RGB OUT connector, set “Dual Monitor” to “Off” in Page 1 of the General
Setup menu. When you use the equipment connected to the RGB OUT
connector as the second monitor to display a still image, etc., set “Dual
Monitor” to “On” in Page 1 of the General Setup menu. (See page 45.)

Outputting Video Signals to External Equipment

125

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

to VIDEO
OUT AUX

Projector, etc.

RGB OUT

Conducting a Conference Without the
Picture – Voice Meeting
Using the PCS-1/1P Video Communication System, you can conduct a
conference only through voices via a normal phone without connecting the
videoconferencing system. (Voice Meeting)
Basic connecting procedures are the same as those for videoconferencing.
Conducting a voice meeting with a remote party not registered in the phone
book
Set “Line I/F” to “ISDN(Telephone)” in the Dial Setup menu.
During the Voice Meeting, the “Voice Only” indicator is displayed.
For “Line I/F” setting, see “To call a remote party not registered in the Phone
Book” on page 74.
To register a remote party for a Voice Meeting
Set “Line I/F” to “ISDN(Telephone)” in the List Edit menu displayed from the
Phone Book menu.
For registration, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page 63.
To set the audio compression format
Select the audio compression format by setting “Telephone Mode” in Page 4
of the Dial Setup menu.
When you initiate the voice meeting, set “Telephone Mode” to “Auto”. When
set to “Auto”, the G.711 µ-law format is automatically selected.
You need not set the audio compression format when receiving a call from the
remote party.
For the “Telephone Mode” setting, see page 43.

126

Conducting a Conference Without the Picture – Voice Meeting

Controlling the Remote System With
the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission
The Video Communication System enables you to control the remote system
connected by transmitting the tone signal (DTMF: Dual Tone Multi
Frequency) assigned to the numbers for dialing (0-9, , ).

1

Press the

button on the Remote Commander during communication.

The DTMF menu appears on the monitor screen.

2

Press one of the number buttons (0-9, , ) on the Remote Commander
corresponding to the tone signal you want to transmit to the remote party.
The tone signal will be transmitted when the button is pressed.

3

To stop transmitting the tone signal, press the PUSH ENTER button on the
Remote Commander.
The DTMF menu disappears.
Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Controlling the Remote System With the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission

127

Conducting a Data Conference Using
NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference
Connecting the Communication Terminal to the computer with NetMeeting*
installed enables conduct of a data conference in compliance with the T.120
standard of the ITU-T Recommendation via the PCS-1/1P Video
Communication System only when it is connected over ISDN.
*

NetMeeting is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Notes

• When the Communication Terminal is used for a multipoint videoconference, the
T.120 data conference is not available.
• When the PCS-1/1P Video Communication System is connected with a
videoconferencing system at the remote party via LAN, conduct the T.120 data
conference without using the PCS-1/1P.

To connect a computer
To connect a computer to the connector on the Communication
Terminal
Use a commercially available UTP cross cable (category 5) to connect the
LAN connector on the computer with the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector
on the Communication Terminal.

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

TERMINAL

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

AUDIO OUT

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T

PCS-B768
ISDN Unit

UTP cross cable
(not supplied)
to LAN
connector

Computer

128

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T
UTP cross cable
(not supplied)
to LAN
connector

ISDN

Computer

Conducting a Data Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference

To connect to a computer via a hub
Connect the Communication Terminal to a computer using the UTP straight
cable.
Computer

TERMINAL

VISCA OUT

Hub
AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T

to LAN connector

UTP straight cable (not supplied)

Open Page 2 of the General Setup menu, and enter the IP address of the
computer in which the NetMeeting application is installed in the “T.120 PC
Address” text box. (See page 46.)
To call a remote party to conduct a T.120 data conference
Set “T.120 Data” to “On” in Page 2 of the Dial Setup menu. (See page 42.)
When you receive a call from a remote party to conduct a T.120
data conference
Set “T.120 Data” to “On” in Page 2 of the Answer Setup menu. (See page 45.)
Note

It is recommended that you set “Audio Mode” to “G.728” in the Dial Setup and Answer
Setup menus.

To connect to a remote party using NetMeeting
Before connecting, install the NetMeeting application in your computer.

1

Double-click the NetMeeting icon, or click “NetMeeting” from the Start
menu on the computer’s window.
NetMeeting starts.

2

Set the Communication Terminal to communication mode.
Check that the “T.120” indicator is displayed on the monitor screen.

Conducting a Data Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference

129

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

To configure the Communication Terminal

3

Click “Calling” in the NetMeeting window on the computer of either a
local or remote party.

4

Enter the IP address set for the Communication Terminal in the “Address”
text box of the “Call to” dialog box.

5

Click “Call”.
After a while the connection is completed.

For details on how to operate, refer to the Help menu of the NetMeeting
application.
About the transmission rate
The Communication Terminal supports the following transmission rates:
MLP: 6.4 Kbps, 24 Kbps, 32 Kbps
HMLP: 62.4 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 128 Kbps.

130

Conducting a Data Conference Using NetMeeting – T.120 Data Conference

Accessing the Communication
Terminal
The following controls are available to access the Communication Terminal.
For details on each control, consult your Sony dealer.

Using a Web Browser
Accessing the IP address of the Communication Terminal from a Web browser
allows you to control or set up the Terminal.
To permit accessing the Terminal, set “Web Access” to “Enabled” in the
Administrator Setup Menu (page 54).
For details on the password to access or Web monitoring feature, see
“Administrator Setup Menu” on page 53.

Using Telnet

For details on the password to access or Web monitoring feature, see
“Administrator Setup Menu” on page 53.
The AUX CONTROL jack on the right side of the Communication Terminal
is designed to be used for services.

Accessing the Communication Terminal

131

Chapter 4: Videoconference With Optional Equipment

Accessing the IP address of the Communication Terminal from Telnet allows
you to control or set up the Terminal.
To permit accessing the Terminal, set “Web Access” to “Enabled” in the
Administrator Setup Menu (page 54).

Chapter 5: Data
Conference
This chapter shows you how to use the data from a computer, etc. connected
to the optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box for a conference.
The optional PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box is equipped with various input/
output connectors. For example, connecting the RGB output on a computer
enables you to transmit the pictures or text data displayed on the computer to
a remote party. When you connect a projector, you can display a highresolution image from a computer on the projector at a high transmission rate.
The PCS-DSB1 is also equipped with connectors for connecting active
speakers and microphones. The PCS-DSB1 is connected with the
Communication Terminal using the interface cable for exclusive use.
The party who receives the data, even if the party has no Data Solution Box or
uses another videoconferencing system such as PCS-11/11P, PCS-G70/G70P,
PCS-TL50 and PCS-1600, can view the computer images sent from the other
party. However, the quality of the picture received varies with the components
of the system. If the Data Solution Box is used by the party who receives the
data, a larger number of frames per second is obtained than the system without
the Data Solution Box. It allows you to obtain a high-resolution motion picture
from a computer.
For details on picture quality depending on the system components, see
“Picture quality of the data solution box” on page 138.
For details on RGB signal specifications, see “Acceptable RGB Input/Output
Signals” on page 219.
Restrictions on the IP address of the system when using the Data
Solution Box
The IP address available for the PCS-1/1P Video Communication System is
restricted when you use the Data Solution Box. Moreover, a network for
communication between the Data Solution Box and the Communication
Terminal should be set up to be a separate segment.
As a result, unusable IP address is the value obtained from the AND operation
with the address of the Data Solution Box for communication and the network
mask.
(Unusable IP address for the PCS-1/1P) = (IP address of the PCSDSB1)&(Network mask)
The IP address of the PCS-DSB1 is fixed at “192.254.1.2”. If the Network
mask is assumed to be “255.255.0.0”, an unusable IP address is as follows:
192.254.m.n (0

m

255, 0

n

255)

Note on the camera picture when using the Data Solution Box
When transmitting a signal via the Data Solution Box, the camera picture
quality will be lower owing to the decreased number of frames.

132

Connection Example Using the Data
Solution Box
Notes

• Be sure not to turn on the power of each unit until all the connections are completed.
• Do not connect/disconnect the camera cable or the interface cable with the power on.
Doing so may damage the Camera Unit, Communication Terminal or Data Solution
Box.
• Used with the Data Solution Box for the first time, the Communication Terminal may
automatically upgrade the software of the Data Solution Box. While the upgrading
message is displayed on the monitor screen, be sure not to turn off the Communication
Terminal. Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.
PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit

PCS-P1/P1P Communication
Terminal
ON LINE

Interface cable (supplied with
the PCS-DSB1)

POWER

LAN ALERT

to DSB

to TERMINAL

Rear

Front
RGB IN A

to RGB IN A

LINE OUT

RGB IN B

to RGB
IN B

D-sub 15-pin
cable
(not supplied)

Computer

to LINE
OUT

OUT

AUX
AUX

IN

MIC 1

MIC 2

MIC 3

MIC 4

MIC 5

TO PROCESSOR

RGB OUT

to RGB OUT
to MIC 1
– MIC 5

D-sub 15-pin
cable (not
supplied)

D-sub 15pin cable
(not
supplied)

PCS-A1 (not supplied) or
PCS-A300 microphone (not
supplied)
Active speakers

Projector, etc.

Computer

Connection Example Using the Data Solution Box

133

Chapter 5: Data Conference

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box

Notes on the connection example
• Power to the Data Solution Box is supplied from the PCS-P1/P1P
Communication Terminal with a connection described above.
• Connect a projector, etc. to the RGB OUT connector on the Data Solution
Box.
This connection enables you:
– To display the computer picture on the local site while transmitting it to the
remote site.
– To display the received computer picture with optimum picture quality.
The received computer picture can also be output from the VIDEO OUT or
RGB OUT connector on the PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal, but the
computer picture while transmitting cannot be output from these connectors.
Notes on the connection of a microphone
• Up to five microphones can be connected with the Data Solution Box.
• When using external microphones, the sound transmitted to the remote party
may become unclear due to noises in a conferencing room. In this case speak
close to the microphone.
• When using multiple microphones, the Echo Canceler function cannot be
fully utilized depending on the type of conference room. In this case, try to
suppress any echo in the room or decrease the number of microphones.
• You cannot use the microphones connected to the Data Solution Box
together with those connected to the Communication Terminal or the builtin microphone.

134

Connection Example Using the Data Solution Box

To connect the CTE-600 Communication Transducer
to an input/output connector
Connecting cable
(supplied with the
CTE-600)

Interface box
(supplied with the CTE-600)
to DC 6V

CTE-600

to LINE
IN

to LINE
OUT

AC adaptor
(supplied with
the CTE-600)

to a wall
outlet

Connecting cable
(not supplied)
to an input/output
connector
to AUX IN

to AUX OUT
LINE OUT

OUT

AUX

IN

MIC 1

MIC 2

MIC 3

MIC 4

MIC 5

TO PROCESSOR

RGB OUT

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box (Rear)

To use the Communication Transducer connected to the Data Solution Box

Note

You cannot use two or more Communication Transducers in a room and cannot use it
with other microphones together.

For detailed information on the Communication Transducer, refer to the
Operating Instructions that come with the Communication Transducer.

Connection Example Using the Data Solution Box

135

Chapter 5: Data Conference

• Set “CTE” in the Audio Setup menu to “DSB AUX IN” (page 48).
• Set the SYSTEM SELECT switch at the bottom of the Communication
Transducer to “PCS”.

Using Audio/Video Signal from the
Connected Equipment for a Conference
Setting Before Conferencing
To use a microphone connected to the Data Solution Box
Set “Mic Select” to “DSB MIC” in the Audio Setup menu (page 48).
To use a projector, etc. connected to the RGB OUT connector on the Data
Solution Box
Set “Monitor Out (or Sub Monitor Out)” to “RGB OUT (DSB)” in Page 1 of
the General Setup menu (page 45).

Operating the System During a Conference
To select a picture from a computer connected to the Data Solution Box
When using the buttons on the Data Solution Box
Press the RGB A or RGB B button on the upper panel of the Data Solution
Box.
To select the picture from the computer connected to the RGB IN A connector,
press the RGB IN A button, or the RGB IN B button to select that from the
computer connected to the RGB IN B connector.
The indicator of the selected button lights.
RGB A button
RGB A

RGB B button
RGB B

RGB SELECT

SEND

RGB IN A

RGB IN B

When using the Remote Commander

1

Press the VIDEO INPUT SELECT button on the Remote Commander.
The Video Input Select menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the “RGB
A” or “RGB B” input from “DSB Input”.
RGB A: Select the picture from the computer connected to the RGB IN A
connector.

136

Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference

RGB B: Select the picture from the computer connected to the RGB IN B
connector.
Video Input Select

3

Near

Far

DSB Input

Main

Main

RGB A

Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
The indicator of the RGB A or RGB B button on the upper panel of the Data
Solution Box lights according to the selected input.

Note

Even if you select the input with the buttons on the Data Solution Box, the display in
the Video Input Select menu will not change.

To transmit a picture from a computer connected to the Data Solution Box

For details on picture quality, see “Picture quality of the data solution box”
on page 138.
For picture transmission using the Remote Commander, see page 114.
SEND button
RGB A

RGB B

RGB SELECT

SEND

RGB IN A

RGB IN B

Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference

137

Chapter 5: Data Conference

Press the SEND button on the upper panel of the Data Solution Box.
The indicator on the SEND button lights and the picture of the equipment
selected with the RGB A or RGB B button or the VIDEO INPUT SELECT
button is displayed on the projector, etc. connected to the RGB OUT connector
on the Data Solution Box. While in communication, the picture selected on the
Data Solution Box is transmitted to the remote party simultaneously.
Such computer picture is displayed without any conversion as input to the Data
Solution Box. The detailed portion of the picture transmitted to the remote
party may not be clearly seen and the number of frames may be reduced.

Note

While you are transmitting the computer picture, you cannot receive a still image or a
computer picture from any other terminal. Ending your transmission enables you to
receive it. When you are receiving a still image or computer picture from any other
terminal, you cannot transmit a computer picture from equipment connected to the Data
Solution Box.

To transmit the picture from a computer to multiple points
If you install the optional PCS-323M1 H.323 (for LAN) or PCS-320M1 H.320
(for ISDN) MCU software, you can transmit the picture from the computer to
multiple points.
Picture quality of the data solution box
The picture quality received by the remote party varies depending on the type
of the terminal or connecting method, or “Monitor Out (or Sub Monitor Out)”
setting on the remote site. Using the Data Solution Box on the remote site
enables receipt of a high-quality computer picture with larger number of
frames.

138

Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference

When the PCS-1/1P is used as a receiving terminal
Setting of “Monitor
Out (or Sub Monitor
Out)” on the receiving
terminal

Output
connector for a
computer
picture on
receiving
terminal

Resolution

Video
frame
rate

Picture quality

When
“Dual
Monitor”
is set to
“On”

VIDEO
OUT

–

VIDEO OUT
MONITOR
MAIN on the
PCS-P1/P1P

a

a

Outputs the signal by
converting a transmitted
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal
into a 4CIF signal. The
original high-resolution
picture cannot be obtained
and details cannot be clearly
seen. The number of frames
displayed per second
depends on the interface
transmission rate. For
example, one frame per
second is obtained at 1 Mbps.

–

VIDEO
OUT

VIDEO OUT
MONITOR
SUB on the
PCS-P1/P1P

a

a

Outputs the signal by
converting a transmitted
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal
into a 4CIF signal. The
original high-resolution
picture cannot be obtained
and details cannot be clearly
seen. The number of frames
displayed per second
depends on the interface
transmission rate. For
example, one frame per
second is obtained at 1 Mbps.

RGB
OUT

RGB
OUT

RGB OUT on
the PCS-P1/
P1P

a

Outputs the signal by
converting a transmitted
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal
into an XGA signal. The
high-resolution picture can
be obtained. The number of
frames displayed per second
depends on the interface
transmission rate. For
example, one frame per
second is obtained at 1 Mbps.

Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference

139

Chapter 5: Data Conference

When
“Dual
Monitor”
is set to
“Off”

Setting of “Monitor
Out (or Sub Monitor
Out)” on the receiving
terminal
When
“Dual
Monitor”
is set to
“Off”

When
“Dual
Monitor”
is set to
“On”

RGB
OUT
(DSB)

RGB
OUT
(DSB)

Output
connector for a
computer
picture on
receiving
terminal

RGB OUT on
the PCS-DSB1
(only when the
PCS-DSB1 is
enabled)

Resolution

Video
frame
rate

Picture quality

Outputs the signal by
converting a transmitted
VGA, SVGA or XGA signal
into an XGA signal. The
high-resolution picture can
be obtained. You can view
more vivid picture than the
picture output from the RGB
OUT connector on the
Communication Terminal.
The number of frames
displayed per second
depends on the interface
transmission rates. For
example, five frames per
second is obtained at 1 Mbps.
: High, a: Middle, f: Low

For the settings for output of the picture from each output connector, see
“Displaying the Picture on a Projector or Monitor” on page 142, and “Dual
Monitor” and “Monitor Out (or Sub Monitor Out)” in the General Setup
Menu on page 45.
When the PCS-11/11P is used as a receiving terminal
Resolution

Video
frame
rate

Remarks

a

a

Outputs the signal by converting a transmitted VGA, SVGA or XGA
signal into a 4CIF signal. The original high-resolution picture cannot be
obtained and details cannot be clearly seen. The number of frames
displayed per second depends on the interface transmission rate. For
example, one frame per second is obtained at 1 Mbps.
: High, a: Middle, f: Low

140

Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference

When videoconferencing system other than the PCS-1/1P and PCS-11/11P
such as the PCS-1600 is used
Resolution

Video
frame
rate

Remarks

a

f

Sends and receives the pictures in 4CIF, and the original high-resolution
picture cannot be obtained and detailed portion cannot be clearly seen.
The number of frames displayed per second depends on the interface
transmission rates. For example, one frame per several seconds is
obtained.
: High, a: Middle, f: Low

Chapter 5: Data Conference

Using Audio/Video Signal from the Connected Equipment for a Conference

141

Displaying the Picture on a Projector or
Monitor
When you connect the Data Solution Box to the Communication Terminal,
connections with external monitors, etc. using the following four outputs are
available. The connections allow output of the picture to one or two monitors
selected from among four.
Monitor A

to VIDEO OUT
MONITOR
MAIN

Monitor B

to VIDEO OUT
MONITOR
SUB
ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

to RGB OUT

to RGB OUT on the
PCS-DSB1

Monitor D

Monitor C

Outputting the Signal to One Monitor
This setting is available when “Dual Monitor” is set to “Off” in the General
Setup menu. Select the output using “Monitor Out” setting in the General
Setup menu.
VIDEO OUT: Outputs the signal to a monitor (Monitor A in the illustration
above) connected to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR MAIN connector on the
Communication Terminal.
RGB OUT: Outputs the signal to a monitor (Monitor C in the illustration
above) connected to the RGB OUT connector on the Communication
Terminal.

142

Displaying the Picture on a Projector or Monitor

RGB OUT (DSB): Outputs the signal to a monitor (Monitor D in the
illustration above) connected to the RGB OUT connector on the Data
Solution Box.
Note

When “Dual Monitor” is set to “Off” in the General Setup menu, output to a monitor
connected to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR SUB connector is not available.

When connecting the monitor to the RGB OUT connector on the
Data Solution Box
The menus may not be displayed. In this case, change the setup of your system
as described below.
1 Connect your monitor to the RGB OUT connector on the Communication
Terminal.
2 Set “Dual Monitor” to “Off” and “Monitor Out” to “RGB OUT (DSB)” in
the General Setup menu.
3 Change the connection of the monitor to the RGB OUT connector on the
Data Solution Box.

Outputting the Signal to Two Monitors
This setting is available when “Dual Monitor” is set to “On” in the General
Setup menu.
The first monitor for displaying motion pictures is fixed to the monitor
connected to the VIDEO OUT MONITOR MAIN connector on the
Communication Terminal (Monitor A in the illustration).

Displaying the Picture on a Projector or Monitor

143

Chapter 5: Data Conference

Select the output to the second monitor using the “Sub Monitor Out” setting in
the General Setup menu.
VIDEO OUT: Outputs the signal to a monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT
MONITOR SUB connector (Monitor B) on the Communication Terminal.
RGB OUT: Outputs the signal to a monitor (Monitor C) connected to the RGB
OUT connector on the Communication Terminal.
RGB OUT (DSB): Outputs the signal to a monitor (Monitor D) connected to
the RGB OUT connector on the Data Solution Box.

Chapter 6:
Videoconference
Using a
Whiteboard
This chapter describes how to use your whiteboard for your videoconferencing
system.
You can transmit and receive notes written on the whiteboard in real-time in a
videoconference. You can also store the transmitted or received data in a
Memory Stick as still images.
Your whiteboard is usable for a videoconference only when the optional
mimio Xi* is used together with the system.
For product information on the mimio Xi, contact your nearest Sony dealer.
* mimio® is a registered trademark of Virtual Ink Corporation of the United States.
minio Xi is a trademark of Virtual Ink Corporation of the United States.
Note

Videoconferencing using the whiteboard is available only between systems equipped
with the PCS-1/1P or when a receiving terminal is PCS-G70/G70P or PCS-11/11P.
You cannot use this function with other Sony videoconferencing systems such as PCS1600, or other manufacturers’ systems.

144

Connection Example With a Whiteboard
Notes

• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.
• Do not connect/disconnect the cable with the power on. Doing so may damage the
Camera Unit, Communication Terminal or mimio Xi.

Whiteboard

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to WHITE BOARD

Dedicated cable
(supplied with the mimio Xi)

mimio Xi capture bar

Connection Example With a Whiteboard

145

Chapter 6: Videoconference Using a Whiteboard

Notes on using the mimio Xi
• Do not use any cable other than the dedicated cable supplied with the
recorder.
• Attach the capture bar at the upper left corner of the whiteboard.
• Use only the stylus, marker and eraser that come with the mimio Xi for
writing on a whiteboard.
• Do not connect a device other than the mimio Xi to the WHITE BOARD
connector on the Communication Terminal.

Attaching the mimio Xi on the
Whiteboard
Attach the mimio Xi at the upper left corner of a whiteboard vertically or
horizontally, then set the attachment orientation of the mimio Xi and the size
of the whiteboard using the menu.
Vertically

Horizontally

To set the attachment orientation of the mimio-Xi
According to the orientation of the mimio Xi, set “Whiteboard Attachment” to
“Vertical” or “Horizontal” in Page 2 of the General Setup menu (page 46).
To specify the whiteboard size to be used
After selecting “Inches” or “Meters” from “Whiteboard Size Measurement” in
Page 2 of the General Setup menu, select the size of the whiteboard from
“Whiteboard Size” (page 46).
You can select one of the following sizes (height × width):
When you attach the mimio Xi vertically
2'0" × 3'0" (0.6 × 0.9 m), 3'0" × 4'0" (0.9 × 1.2 m), 4'0" × 6'0" (1.2 × 1.8 m),
4'0" × 8'0" (1.2 × 2.4 m)
When you attach the mimio Xi horizontally
3'0" × 2'0" (0.9 × 0.6 m), 4'0" × 3'0" (1.2 × 0.9 m), 6'0" × 4'0" (1.8 × 1.2 m),
8'0" × 4'0" (2.4 × 1.2 m)

146

Attaching the mimio Xi on the Whiteboard

Conducting a Videoconference Using a
Whiteboard

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN or ISDN
ON LINE
ON LINE

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

1

Start the videoconference.

2

When you intend to send the whiteboard picture, press the PUSH ENTER
button on the Remote Commander to display the communication submenu
on the monitor screen.
Communication submenu
Send
Save
Presentation

START

Whiteborad

ON

Icon Display

OFF

OFF

ON

End

3

Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Whiteboard
ON”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The whiteboard picture and icon appears on the monitors of both the local and
remote parties.
When the local party uses the dual monitor mode, it will be displayed on the
sub-monitor (second monitor).

Conducting a Videoconference Using a Whiteboard

147

Chapter 6: Videoconference Using a Whiteboard

Reject Answer

Local monitor screen

4

Remote monitor screen

Write anything using the stylus, marker or eraser that come with the mimio
Xi on the whiteboard.
The notes you are writing are displayed in real-time on the remote and local
monitor screens.

Whiteboard

Monitors on the local and remote
parties

Notes

• Only one whiteboard can be used at a time. If more than two terminals use the
whiteboard with the mimio Xi connected, the whiteboard picture written by the party
who has set “Whiteboard ON” first will be displayed on the monitors of all the
terminals.
• Set both “Far End Camera Control” in the Dial Setup menu (page 42) and “Far End
Camera Control” in the Answer Setup menu (page 44) to “On”. The whiteboard
cannot be used for a videoconference unless these items are set to “On” for all the
participating terminals.
• If a party participates in the middle of the multipoint conference using a whiteboard,
the monitor of the party displays only the whiteboard picture written from that time.
The pictures transmitted before participation are not displayed on his monitor.

148

Conducting a Videoconference Using a Whiteboard

To store the notes written on the whiteboard
Display the communication submenu and then select “Save”.
The whiteboard picture displayed on the monitor will be stored in the
“Memory Stick” as a still image.
Send
Save
Presentation
Whiteboard

OFF

Icon display
Reject Answer

START

OFF

OFF

ON

End

To exit from the whiteboard mode
The whiteboard user should open the communication submenu, select
“Whiteboard OFF”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The pictures displayed on the monitors of all the terminals switch to the normal
camera pictures.
Under this circumstance, any terminal may select “Whiteboard ON”.
Send
Save
Presentation
Whiteboard

OFF

Icon display
Reject Answer

START

OFF

OFF

ON

Note

Once the conference has ended, you cannot display the notes written on the monitor
screen. If you want to do so, storing the notes in a “Memory Stick” is recommended.
See “To store the notes written on the whiteboard”.

Conducting a Videoconference Using a Whiteboard

149

Chapter 6: Videoconference Using a Whiteboard

End

Chapter 7:
Encrypted
Videoconference
via LAN
When a highly confidential videoconference is required or a videoconference
is held via internet, the Video Communication System enables transmission
and reception of encrypted video, audio and data output from the Data Solution
Box between the systems identified as the same password. Conducting a
videoconference using this feature is known as an encrypted videoconference
via LAN.
This chapter describes how to conduct an encrypted videoconference via LAN.
The encrypted videoconference via LAN is available only between PCS-1/1P
Video Communication Systems connected via LAN. You cannot conduct an
encrypted videoconference if the system is connected via an ISDN, via ISDN
& LAN, or with Sony video communication systems other than the PCS-1/1P
or with other manufacturers’ videoconferencing systems.
The encryption feature can also be used in multipoint conference using LAN
connection (including the cascade connection via LAN).
Note

In an encrypted conference only video signals, audio signals and RGB signals from a
computer connected to the Data Solution Box are encrypted. Camera control signals (for
controlling the other party’s camera) and whiteboard pictures cannot be encrypted.

150

Preparing for an Encrypted
Videoconference via LAN
To start an encrypted videoconference, each terminal has to set the same
password and set “Encryption via LAN” to “On” in the Encryption via LAN
menu.
Encryption via LAN
Page: 1/1
Encryption via LAN

Off

Encryption Password

Save

Cancel

1

Enter a password using 13 to 20 alphabetical characters, numerals or
symbols.

2

Select “On” from “Encryption via LAN” in the Encryption via LAN menu.

For details on setting, see “Encryption via LAN Menu” on page 61.
Notes

• If you set “Encryption via LAN” to “On”, you cannot connect to a terminal that is not
equipped with the encryption feature to a terminal with “Encryption via LAN” set to
“Off”, or to a terminal without the same password as that of your system.
• You can conduct a videoconference without an encryption feature with a terminal
connected via an ISDN even if you set “Encryption via LAN” to “On”.

Chapter 7: Encrypted
Videoconference via LAN

Preparing for an Encrypted Videoconference via LAN

151

Starting an Encrypted Videoconference
via LAN
You can start an encrypted videoconference via LAN by calling a remote party
in the same manner as a daily videoconference.
During an encrypted videoconference via LAN, the
(encryption) icon is
displayed on the screen.

Notes

• When the
icon is not displayed on the screen, transmission and reception data
will not be encrypted. Be sure to confirm if the
icon is displayed before starting
an encrypted videoconference.
• As the encryption feature is not available for a terminal connected via an ISDN, the
icon does not appear on the screen of such a terminal.

When the encrypted videoconference via LAN is disabled
If the following message appears when you call a remote party, an encrypted
videoconference via LAN is not available.
Error Messages

Causes

The encryption feature on a farend system is disabled.

The encryption feature via LAN on the remote
system is disabled.

The entered password for the
encryption feature is not correct.

The password entered on the remote system is
not the same as that on the local system.

The encrypted videoconference is While the videoconference is held via an ISDN
not available if any terminal is
connection, you cannot connect any terminal via
connected via ISDN.
the LAN connection if your encryption via LAN
feature is activated.

152

Starting an Encrypted Videoconference via LAN

This chapter describes how to conduct a multipoint videoconference using the
H.323 and/or H.320 protcol.
For conducting a multipoint videoconference, installation of the optional
PCS-323M1 MCU software (for LAN connection) based on the H.323
standard or the optional PCS-320M1 MCU software (for ISDN connection)
based on the H.320 standard is required.
Multipoint videoconference among up to ten points including the local site is
available when connecting via a LAN.
When connecting via ISDN lines, you can conduct a multipoint
videoconference among up to six points including the local site. You can use
a normal phone at up to five points over ISDN.
A multipoint videoconference using the ISDN and LAN connections mixed is
also available.
To conduct a videoconference using SIP, see Chapter 9.
Restrictions on the use of the MCU software
• When a multipoint videoconference is held via LAN, the bandwidth is
automatically set so that the total value of all the points is 1920 Mbps at
maximum. The bit rate for each point varies with the points you connect.
• When a multipoint videoconference is held via ISDN, the same number of
channels should be used on all the points and the total channels are up to 12B.
• The supported video modes are H.263 and H.261 only.
• The supported audio modes are G.711, G.722 and G.728 only.

153

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Chapter 8:
Multipoint
Videoconference

Connection Examples for a Multipoint
Videoconference
Using the LAN Connection (Up to 6 Points)
Installing the optional PCS-323M1 H.323MCU software in one
Communication Terminal allows you to conduct a multipoint videoconference
among up to six points.
If the Communication Terminal is called from a new remote party during a
point-to-point videoconference, it can shift to a multipoint conference
automatically (“On the fly” feature).

PCS-323M1
H.323 MCU
software
TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T

UTP cable (category 5, straight)
(not supplied)

to LAN

LAN

Note

For a multipoint videoconference, only the Communication Terminal in which the PCS323M1 H.323 MCU software has been installed is used as main terminal. If you want
to use multiple Communication Terminals as main terminals depending on the type of
conference, the same number of H.323 MCU software as that of the main terminals is
required.

154

Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference

Using the Cascade Connection via LAN (Up to 10 Points)
Installing the optional PCS-323M1 H.323MCU software in two
Communication Terminals enables cascade connection, allowing you to
conduct a multipoint videoconference among up to ten points.
Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

PCS-323M1 H.323
MCU software
PCS-323M1
H.323 MCU
software

to LAN
ON LINE

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

POWER

LAN ALERT

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T
UTP cable (category 5,
straight) (not supplied)

LAN

LAN

Notes

• Installing the PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU software into three or more Communication
Terminals does not allow cascade connection. Note that the third or later terminals
should set “Multipoint Mode” to “Auto” in the Multipoint Setup menu or in the Setup
menu.
• For cascade connection, the “Split” and “Split (Fixed)” modes are not available. Only
the “Voice Activate” mode is available.

Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference

155

Using the ISDN Connection
Installing the optional PCS-320M1 H.320MCU software in one
Communication Terminal allows you to conduct a multipoint videoconference
among up to six points by using the optional PCS-B384 or PCS-B768 ISDN
Unit.
The illustration shows an example using
the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.
PCS-320M1
H.320 MCU
software
TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

PCS-B384 or
PCS-B768 ISDN
Unit

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to ISDN 1-6

ISDN
to ISDN lines

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

ISDN modular cables
(not supplied)

LAN ALERT

About the number of ISDN lines used and number of remote
parties for a multipoint conference
You can select the number of ISDN channels to be used for connecting the first
remote point using “Number of Lines” in the Setup (participants) menu or the
Multipoint Setup menu of the Administrator Setup menu.
1B (64K): Connection via a 1B channel
2B (128K): Connection via 2B channels
4B (256K): Connection via 4B channels
6B (384K): Connection via 6B channels
The number of connectable remote point is defined by the number of ISDN
lines used and the “Number of Lines” setting. For example, when you use three
ISDN lines (up to 6B channels are usable) and set the menu to “4B (256K),”
4B channels are used for the first remote point connection, and the remaining
2B channels are used for the second remote point connection.

156

Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference

Note

When you are called from a remote party and the remote party has set a lower number
of ISDN channels than that in this terminal, the setting on the remote party’s terminal
has priority.

Notes

• When using the ISDN connections, installing the PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software
into two or more Communication Terminals does not allow cascade connection.
• For a multipoint videoconference only the Communication Terminal in which the
PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software is installed is used as the main terminal. If you
want to use two or more Communication Terminals as main terminals depending on
the type of conference, the same number of H.320 MCU software as that of the main
terminals is required.

Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference

157

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

To connect with a normal phone
When you are using an ISDN connection, a normal phone can be connected at
up to five points.
Only the 1B (64K) connection is available for a normal phone.

Using the LAN and ISDN connections
Installing both the PCS-323M1 H.323 and PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software
in one Communication Terminal enables conduct of a multipoint
videoconference with the terminals connected via a LAN and ISDN.

The illustration shows an example using
the PCS-B768 ISDN Unit.

PCS-323M1
H.323 and
PCS-320M1
H.320 MCU
software

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

PCS-B384 or
PCS-B768
ISDN Unit

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T

to ISDN 1- 6

ISDN modular
cable
(not supplied)

UTP cable (category 5,
straight) (not supplied)
to ISDN line
to LAN

ISDN

ON LINE
ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT

Note

The connection example above includes four terminals via the LAN connection and one
terminal via the ISDN connection. There is no limitation on the number of LAN and
ISDN connections.

158

Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference

Using the LAN and ISDN cascade connection

LAN*

ON LINE

POWER

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN ALERT
ON LINE

PCS-323M1
PCS-320M1

1

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

2

3

4

5

POWER

LAN ALERT

PCS-323M1
PCS-320M1

6

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

1

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

2

3

4

5

6

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

* Be sure to use a LAN connection.

Note

Be sure to make connection between two Communication Terminals via LAN. Even if
the PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software is installed in both the Terminals, cascade
connection via an ISDN is not available.

Connection Examples for a Multipoint Videoconference

159

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Installing both the PCS-323M1 H.323 and PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU software
in two Communication Terminals enables cascade connection including two
main terminals. Connecting four terminals to one main terminal allows you to
conduct a multipoint videoconference via a LAN and ISDN among up to ten
points.

Preparing for a multipoint
videoconference
Installing the MCU software
Notes on installing the MCU software
• You cannot install the software if the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick
in which the MCU software is stored is set to “LOCK”.
• Once the MCU software is installed in the Communication Terminal, the
software will not be used again.
• You cannot install the MCU software which is copied to another Memory
Stick with a computer, etc.

1

Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
the off position (a).

2

Insert the “Memory Stick” containing the PCS-323M1 or PCS-320M1
MCU software into the Memory Stick slot.
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark facing
upward.

PCS-323M1 or PCS-320M1 MCU software

3

Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
the on position (@).
The MCU software is installed in the Communication Terminal.

160

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

To check if the installation of the software is completed
The multipoint mode icon appears in the launcher menu when “Multipoint
Mode” is set to “On”.

Phone Book
Dial

Menu

Angle Adj.

Press to show help

IP:0.0.0.0
Video:Main

ISDN:012345678912
Audio:MIC(INT)+AUX

Multipoint mode icon

The installed software will be shown in “Software Option” of the Machine
Information menu.
For details on the Machine Information menu, see “Machine Information
Menu” on page 59.

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

161

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Connect

Setting for a Multipoint Videoconference
You can set various items regarding a multipoint videoconference using the
Setup (participants) menu or the Multipoint Setup menu of the Administrator
Setup menu.
Setup (participants) menu
Select “Multipoint Mode” to “ On” or “Auto”.
The other items for a multipoint videoconference can be set in the Multipoint
Setup menu.
Setup

Video/Audio

Sound Priority

Multipoint Mode

On

Keep pressing the [MENU] button to show
more detailed setup menus.

Save

Cancel

Multipoint Mode
On: Always conducts a multipoint videoconference.
Auto: Automatically shifts from a point-to-point videoconference to a
multipoint videoconference.

162

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

Multipoint Setup menu
Set “Multipoint Mode” to “On”or “Auto”, and set other items in the menu.
Multipoint Setup
Page: 1/2

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Multipoint Mode

ISDN
On

Broadcast Mode

Split

Number of Lines

2B (128K)

Total LAN Bandwidth

1024 Kbps

Restrict

Auto

Save

Cancel

Save

Cancel

Multipoint Setup
Page: 2/2
Video Mode

ALL

Audio Mode

ALL

Display Terminal Name

On

Far End Camera Control

On

Reject Answer

Off

For details on the setting of the items, see “Multipoint Setup Menu” on page
57.
Note

The settings in the Multipoint setup menu have priority over those in the Dial Setup or
Answer Setup menu.

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

163

Registering the Remote Parties in the Multipoint Connection List
You can register the multipoint connection list that includes all remote parties
for a multipoint videoconference in the Phone Book. It allows you to dial all
the parties simultaneously.
You can enter new remote parties to register the multipoint connection list, or
add the parties registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint connection list.
To register a multipoint connection list in the Phone Book
The basic procedure for registration is the same as the registration of a remote
party for a point-to-point videoconference.
For details on the procedure, see “Registering a New Remote Party” on page
63.

1

Select “New Entry” in the Phone Book menu to display the List Edit menu,
then enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.
For details on entry, see steps 1 to 3 “Registering a New Remote Party”
on page 63.
List Edit
Index MULTILIST
IP

IP
Line I/F
IP
LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps

Save

2

Cancel

Select the line interface you are using for multipoint connection under
“Line I/F”.
Select “
IP” to use the LAN connection, “
ISDN” to use the ISDN
connection, and “
IP & ISDN” to use the LAN and ISDN connections.
List Edit
Index MULTI LIST
IP

IP
Line I/F

IP
ISDN
LAN
ISDN (Telephone)
IP
ISDN
IP&ISDN
SIP

Save

164

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

Cancel

3

Select the line interface icon or a still image to be displayed in the Phone
Book.
The icon is shown as “

4

IP”, “

ISDN” or “

IP & ISDN”.

Set up the line interface of the remote parties.

When “
ISDN” is selected
Enter the telephone numbers of all the parties in the A to E text boxes.
To register a normal phone, enter the telephone number with “T” at the
beginning. (e.g., T0312345678)

When “

IP&ISDN” is selected

Select the interface (IP or ISDN) used from the drop-down list on the right of
the A to E text boxes, then enter the IP addresses for the LAN connection and
the telephone numbers for the ISDN connection for all the parties to be
connected for a multipoint conference.
To register a normal phone, enter the telephone number with “T” at the
beginning. (e.g., T0312345678)
List Edit
Index MULTILIST2

IP
ISDN

A

IP

B

IP

C

IP

D

IP

E

IP

Save

Line I/F

IP&ISDN

LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps
Number of Lines
6 B (384K)

Cancel

For details on the setups, see step 5 in “Registering a New Remote Party”
on page 63.

5

Press the V or v button to select “Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.

To specify a remote party registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint
connection list

1

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the name
you want to register in the multipoint connection list.

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

165

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

When “
IP” is selected
Enter the IP addresses of all the parties in the A to E text boxes.

2

Press the
button on the Remote Commander, or press the PUSH
ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “
On”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

IP

ISDN

IP

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS

On

Dial
Edit
Copy

PARIS
0.0.0.0

Delete

The
(multipoint) mark is added to the upper left of the selected name in
the list and the remote party is registered in the multipoint connection list.
You can add the
marks for up to five parties using the same procedure as
above. The
marks are displayed at the upper right corner of the Phone
Book, showing how many points you registered for a multipoint connection.
Number of registered points
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

IP

ISDN

IP

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS
New Entry

PARIS
0.0.0.0

Multipoint mark

Note

To delete the
mark from the name list, press the
button again, or press the
PUSH ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “
Off”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.

166

3

Select one of the remote parties with the
ENTER button.

4

Press the V or v button to select “
the PUSH ENTER button.

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

mark, then press the PUSH

Edit” from the submenu, then press

The List Edit menu appears. All the IP addresses or telephone numbers of the
parties marked with
are entered in the number text boxes.
List Edit
Index
IP

123.123.123.123

B

123.123.123.124

C

123.123.123.125

D

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

A

Line I/F

IP

LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps

E

Save

Cancel

5

Enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.

6

Select “Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.

Preparing for a multipoint videoconference

167

Starting a Multipoint Videoconference
Calling Remote Parties
To call remote parties registered in the multipoint connection lists

1

Select the multipoint connection list registered in the Phone Book.
The multipoint connection lists are marked with “
IP & ISDN”.

2

IP”, “

ISDN” or “

Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote
Commander, or press the PUSH ENTER button to display the submenu,
press the V or v button to select “
Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

IP

ISDN

OSAKA

NEW YORK

IP
Dial

TOKYO
0.0.0.0

MULTI LIST

Edit
Copy
Delete

The system begins dialing the numbers of the remote parties registered in the
multipoint connection list. “
Dialing (IP)”, “
Dialing (ISDN)” or
“Dialing ( IP & ISDN)” appears on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE
indicator (blue) on the Communication Terminal blinks.
When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Meeting
starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and
lights.
To call remote parties by selecting from the Phone Book

1

168

Select a remote party to which you want to connect for a multipoint
videoconference from the Phone Book.

Starting a Multipoint Videoconference

2

Press the
button on the Remote Commander, or press the PUSH
ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “
On”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Phone Book
RECENT

TOKYO

Bob

0-9

John

A-I
J-S
T-Z
IP

ISDN

On

ISDN

Dial

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS

Edit
Copy

PARIS
1234567

Delete

The
(multipoint) mark is added to the upper left of the selected name in the
Phone Book list and the remote party is specified to the party for multipoint
connection.
You can add the
marks for up to five parties using the same procedure as
above. The
marks added are displayed at the upper right corner of the
Phone Book menu.
Number of specified points
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

0-9

John

A-I
J-S
T-Z
IP

ISDN

ISDN

OSAKA

NEW YORK

PARIS
New Entry

BOSS
0123456

Multipoint mark

Note

To delete the
mark from the name list, press the
button again, or press the PUSH
ENTER button to open the submenu, press the V or v button to select “
Off”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.

3

Select one of the remote parties with the

4

Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote
Commander, or press the PUSH ENTER button to open the submenu, press
the V or v button to select “ Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.

mark.

Starting a Multipoint Videoconference

169

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Recent
IP

The system begins dialing the number of the remote party with the
marks.
“ Dialing (IP)”, “ Dialing (ISDN)” or “ Dialing (IP & ISDN)”appears
on the monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the
Communication Terminal blinks.
When the system connects to all the parties, the message “Meeting starts!”
appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and lights.
To call remote parties not registered in the Phone Book
Basic operations are the same as those for starting a point-to-point conference.
For details, see “To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book” on
page 74.

1

Select “Dial” in the launcher menu to open the Dial menu.

2

Select the line interface you are using for multipoint connection under
“Line I/F”.
Select “
IP” to use LAN connection, “
ISDN” to use ISDN line
IP & ISDN” to use LAN and ISDN connections.
connection, and “
Dial

Line I/F
IP
ISDN
ISDN (2B)
1024 Kbps
ISDN (Telephone)
IP

IP
A2
B1
B2

ISDN
IP&ISDN
SIP
More Options

3

Dial

Save

Set up the line interface of the remote parties.
When “
IP” is selected
Enter the IP addresses of all the parties in the A to E text boxes.
When “
ISDN” is selected
Enter the telephone numbers of all the parties in the A to E text boxes.
To register a normal phone, enter the telephone number with “T” at the
beginning. (e.g., T0312345678)
When “
IP&ISDN” is selected
Select the interface (IP or ISDN) used from the drop-down list on the right of
the A to E text boxes, then enter the IP addresses for the LAN connection and
the telephone numbers for the ISDN connection for all the parties to be
connected for a multipoint conference.

170

Starting a Multipoint Videoconference

To register a normal phone, enter the telephone number with “T” at the
beginning. (e.g., T0312345678)
Dial
IP

B

IP

C

IP

D

IP

E

IP

More Options

Dial

Line I/F

IP&ISDN
LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps
Number of Lines
6 B (384K)

Save

For details on the setups, see step 3 in “To call a remote party not
registered in the Phone Book” on page 74.

4

Select “Dial”, and press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote
Commander. You can also press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
button on the Remote Commander.

/

)

The system begins dialing the numbers selected in step 3. “
Dialing (IP)”,
“
Dialing (ISDN)” or “
Dialing (IP & ISDN)” appears on the monitor
screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the Communication Terminal
blinks.
When the system connects to all the remote parties, the message “Meeting
starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops blinking and
lights.
To call the second and other remote parties
After starting communication with the remote party selected first, press the
CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote Commander to
open the submenu.

Disconnect

Phone Book

Dial

Cancel

You can connect the second and other remote parties one by one, using the
same procedures as those for a point-to-point conference.
Select “Phone Book” from the submenu, then perform steps 2 and 3 of the
procedure in “To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book” on page 78.
Or, select “Dial”, then perform steps 2 to 4 of the procedure in “To call a
remote party not registered in the Phone Book” on page 74.
Starting a Multipoint Videoconference

171

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

A

If some points are not connected
The following dialog appears. Select the desired item.
Some Positions were not connected.
Status

A

B

C

Cause Code

D

E

XX

YY

Start Meeting
Disconnect All

Redial

Start Meeting: Starts a conference with remote parties connected.
Disconnect All: Cancels all the connections and restores the launcher menu.
Redial: Redials the numbers of the points that you failed to connect.

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
Operations are the same as those for a point-to-point conference.
For details, see “Receiving a Call from a Remote Party” on page 82.

172

Starting a Multipoint Videoconference

Using the Display Control
During a multipoint videoconference with the MCU software installed in the
communication Terminal you can control the following operations.

You can use the “Split”, “Split (Fixed)”, “Voice Activate” and “Broadcast”
modes.
Split mode
This mode allows display of the pictures from the connected remote terminals
and the picture of the local terminal by splitting the monitor screen.
According to the connected terminals, four-split windows (1 to 3 terminals
connected) or six-split windows (4 and 5 terminals connected) are displayed.
Pictures A to C (or A to E) appear in order of connecting.
Four-split window
Picture A

Six-split window
Picture B

Picture A

Picture B

Picture C

Picture D

Picture E

Picture on the local Picture C
site

Picture on the local site

Notes

• When the six-split window is displayed, the System detects the terminal including the
loudest sound among all the terminals and displays the picture of that terminal in the
lower right window. The picture on the local site is then displayed in the window
where the picture of the detected terminal was displayed.
• If you switch the broadcast mode from Split mode to Voice Activate mode in which
a picture of a specified terminal is shown in full screen during communication, the
location of Pictures A to E will be changed when the Split mode is restored.
• When your system is in the Split or Split (Fixed) mode, you cannot control the camera
on any connected remote terminals.

Using the Display Control

173

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

What is “Broadcast Mode”?

Split (Fixed) mode
The pictures from the connected remote terminals and the picture of the local
terminal are displayed by splitting the monitor screen as the same manner as
those in the split mode.
You can specify a picture among the split windows to fix it in the lower right
window for the six-split mode. Pictures other than the specified one will be
displayed in the split windows in order of connecting.
Six-split window

The picture of the specified terminal is
always displayed in this window.

Voice Activate mode
Detects the terminal with the speaker with the loudest voice among the
connected terminals, and displays the picture of that terminal in full screen on
all the sites. The “V.A” indicator appears when the Voice Activate mode is
activated. The
indicator with alphabet showing the terminal of the
displayed picture also appears. The
indicator is displayed while the local
picture is broadcast.
Broadcast mode
You can specify the terminal to display the picture of that terminal in full
screen on all the sites. The
indicator with alphabet showing the terminal
of the displayed picture also appears. The
indicator is displayed while the
local picture is broadcast.

174

Using the Display Control

Broadcast Modes and Displayed Windows

Connection status

Connecting points (max.)

Broadcast Mode

Split

Split
(Fixed)

Non-cascade connection

Cascade connection

LAN connection (See page
154.)
ISDN connection (See page
156.)
LAN & ISDN connection (See
page 158)

LAN cascade connection (See
page 155.)
LAN&ISDN cascade
connection (See page 159.)

6

10

1-3 terminals
connected

Four-split window

–

4-5 terminals
connected

Six-split window

–

1-3 terminals
connected

–

–

4-5 terminals
connected

Six-split window

–

Voice Activate

Full screen

Broadcast

Full screen

Full screen

–

Using the Display Control

175

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

The chart described below shows the window displayed on the monitor screen
when you select one of the Broadcast Modes. According to the connection
status of your system, some modes cannot be selected. In the connection status
with no window shown in the chart, the corresponding mode is not available.

Switching the Broadcast Mode
At the beginning of the conference the mode set with “Broadcast Mode” in the
Multipoint Setup menu is activated. You can switch the mode during
communication.

1

Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.
The Display Control menu appears.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Broadcast Mode”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
Display Control
Display

Control

Broadcast Mode

Far

Near
Camera

Split

Split: Selects the Split mode.
Split (A Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected first to fix
in the Split (Fixed) mode.
Split (B Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected second to
fix in the Split (Fixed) mode.
Split (C Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected third to fix
in the Split (Fixed) mode.
Split (D Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected fourth to
fix in the Split (Fixed) mode.
Split (E Fixed): Specifies the picture of the terminal connected fifth to fix
in the Split (Fixed) mode.
Split (Near End Fixed): Fixes the local picture in the Split (Fixed) mode.
Voice Activate: Selects the Voice Activate mode.
Self Broadcast: Broadcasts the near end (local) party in the Broadcast
mode.
A Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected first in the
Broadcast mode.
B Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected second in
the Broadcast mode.
C Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected third in the
Broadcast mode.
D Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected fourth in
the Broadcast mode.
E Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected fifth in the
Broadcast mode.
Stop Broadcast: Stops broadcasting in the Broadcast Mode.

176

Using the Display Control

To display the local picture in the Voice Activate mode
You can display the local picture only on your monitor screen while the
broadcast mode remains in Voice Activate mode.

1

Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Near” under “Display”, then press
the PUSH ENTER button.
The local picture appears on your monitor screen.

To restore the Voice Activate mode
Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander again, and select
“Far” under “Display”.

Receiving the Broadcast Requested From Any Other Terminal
When you receive “Self Broadcast” command from one of the terminals
connected, the picture of that terminal is broadcast in full screen.
When you receive “Stop Broadcat” command from one of the terminals
connected, the system returns to the previous mode.
Notes

• If you have received “Self Broadcast” command from another terminal, the operation
above will not be carried out.
• When you use a cascade connection, the Video Communication System supports the
Voice Activate mode only.

Using the Display Control

177

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

The Display Control menu appears.

Ending the Multipoint Videoconference
1

Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
Commander.

/

) button on the Remote

The following submenu appears.
Phone Book

Disconnect

Dial

Cancel

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Disconnect”, then press the PUSH
ENTER button.
The screen changes to the split window screen and the following menu appears.
The location of the pictures in the split windows A to E (or A to C) is restored
to that when the terminals were connected.
You can display the terminal names in this window if you set “Display
Terminal Name” to “On” in the Multipoint Setup menu.
Picture A

Picture B

Disconnect A

Disconnect B

Picture C

Disconnect C

Disconnect D

Picture D

Disconnect E

Disconnect All

Cancel

Picture E

Local picrure

3

Use the V, v, B or b button to select the terminal to be disconnected, then
press the PUSH ENTER button.
Disconnect A: Disconnects the terminal connected first.
Disconnect B: Disconnects the terminal connected second.
Disconnect C: Disconnects the terminal connected third.
Disconnect D: Disconnects the terminal connected fourth.
Disconnect E: Disconnects the terminal connected fifth.
Disconnect All: Disconnects all the terminals.
The selected terminal is disconnected.
You can disconnect all the terminals by pressing the CONNECT/
DISCONNECT ( / ) button again.

To cancel the disconnection
Select “Cancel” in step 3, then press the PUSH ENTER button.

178

Ending the Multipoint Videoconference

Notes on Secondary
Terminals

When a terminal whose video mode is
QCIF standard only
The system does not send video to the QCIF
terminal.

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

If there is a terminal that is not adequate for
the settings set by this system, that terminal
is called the secondary terminal.
Communication capabilities between the
secondary terminal and this system are
shown below.
• Sending/receiving audio
• Receiving video from the secondary
terminal
• Disables transmission of video to the
secondary terminal
For details on the secondary terminal, see
Glossary on page 228.
When a normal phone is connected
The audio mode of the other terminals is not
affected if a normal phone is connected or
disconnected any time.
When terminals with “Far End
Camera Control” set to “On” and
“Off” are mixed
As the bit rate of video signals differs
depending on the setting of “Far End
Camera Control”, the picture is not
displayed on some terminals.
When a 56K network is mixed among
the terminals if the conference is held
via 64K network
The conference automatically changes to
that via 56 K network. Terminals that cannot
change to that network are regarded as
secondary terminals, and the transmission of
video is not available.
When a terminal with different audio
mode is connected and its video bit
rate is different
The conference is conducted in the video
mode according to the terminal with the
lowest video bit rate. A terminal that cannot
fit this rate is regarded as a secondary
terminal, and the transmission of video is not
available.

Notes on Secondary Terminals

179

Connecting the External MCU
Connecting the external MCU (Multipoint Control Unit) enables conduct of a
multipoint videoconference unless the MCU software is installed into the
Communication Terminal.

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

LAN or ISDN

MCU

PCS-1/1P

Activating the Chair Control
If the MCU for the ISDN connection is equipped with the chair control
function, the chair control can be activated for up to 99 terminals connected.
The chair control mode allows you to specify any terminal to display on the
monitor screen, to broadcast the specified picture to all the terminals, or to
broadcast the local picture to all the terminals.

1

Press the FAR/NEAR button on the Remote Commander.
The Display Control menu opens.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Chair Request” under “Broadcast
Mode”.
Display Control

3
180

Display

Control

Far

Near
Camera

Broadcast Mode Terminal

Chair
Request

1

Press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote Commander.

Connecting the External MCU

The chair control is activated and you can control up to 99 terminals. The chair
control feature is canceled if you set “Broadcast Mode” to “Chair Release”.
Note

When you operate incorrectly, the message “MCU operation rejected.” will appear
on the monitor screen.

1

Open the Display Control menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Receive” under “Broadcast Mode”.

3

Use the V, v, B or b button to select the number of the terminal you want
to view in the box under “Terminal”, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The picture of the selected terminal is displayed on the local screen.

Notes

• When no terminal is selected, the picture of the smallest terminal number will be
displayed.
• The terminal number is assigned to a terminal based on the information on each
terminal obtained from the MCU.

To broadcast the selected picture to all terminals

1

Open the Display Control menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Broadcast” under “Broadcast Mode”.

3

Use the V, v, B or b button to select the number of the terminal you want
to broadcast in the box under “Terminal”, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.
The picture of the selected terminal is displayed on the local screen and is
broadcast to all terminals.

To broadcast a local picture to all terminals

1

Open the Display Control menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Broadcast” under “Broadcast Mode”.

3

Use the V, v, B or b button to display “0” in the box under “Terminal”,
then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The local picture is broadcast to all terminals. The
the monitor screen.

indicator is shown on

Connecting the External MCU

181

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Displaying the picture of the selected terminal

Exiting the chair control

1

Open the Display Control menu.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Chair Release” under “Broadcast
Mode”.
The chair control is not available for the local party.

182

Connecting the External MCU

Multipoint Attribute
Attribute

Value (H.320 MCU)

Value (H.323 MCU)

1

Maximum number of terminals 5 (6 when including the
that can be connected to a single local terminal)
MCU

5 (6 when including the
local terminal)

2

Maximum number of
concurrent (independent)
conferences that can be
supported in a single MCU

1

1

3

Maximum number of ports that 0
can be connected to other
MCUs

1

4.1

Network interfaces at each port

BRI

LAN

4.2

Restricted network capability

Restrict_Required

–

5

Transmission rates available at
each port

1B, 2B, 4B, 6B

Total rate of all points
Max. 1920 Kbps

6

Audio Processor

Equipped

Equipped

6.1

mixed/switched
noise/echo suppression on
“silent” ports

Mixed
No

Mixed
No

6.2

audio algorithm at each port

G.711, G.728, G.722

G.711, G.728, G.722

7

Video Processor (motion
pictures)

Equipped

Equipped

7.1

switched/mixed

Voice activated/fourVoice activated/foursplit/six-split/user control split/six-split/user control

7.2

video algorithm at each port

H.261, H.263

H.261, H.263

8

Data Processor

Equipped

Equipped

8.1

data broadcast facility, LSD
data broadcast facility, HSD

Equipped
No

–
–

8.2

MLP Processor

Equipped

–

9

Encryption

No support

Support

Multipoint Attribute

183

Chapter 8: Multipoint Videoconference

Number

Number

Attribute

Value (H.320 MCU)

Value (H.323 MCU)

10

Method of choosing Selected
Communication Mode - SCM

Custom:
Number of lines (1B/
2B/4B/6B)
Audio algorithm
(G.711, G.728, G.722)
Auto:
Video frame rate (7.5/
10/15/30fps)
Video encoding mode
(CIF/QCIF)
Fixed or switched
automatically:
Video algorithm
(H.261 fixed, H.261 or
H.263 switched
automatically)
Restrict (56K fixed/
Auto)

Custom:
LAN bandwidth (Total
rate of all points, max.
1920 Kbps)
Audio algorithm
(G.711, G.728, G.722)
Auto:
Video frame rate (7.5/
10/15/30fps)
Video encoding mode
(CIF/QCIF)
Fixed or switched
automatically:
Video algorithm
(H.261 fixed, H.261 or
H.263 switched
automatically)

11

Capability of secondary
terminals

Capable of audio
sending/receiving and
video receiving only.
Capable of audio
sending/receiving only
via a normal phone.

Capable of audio
sending/receiving and
video receiving only.
Capable of audio
sending/receiving only
via a normal phone.

12

Call setup provision(s)

No call/receive
reservation

No call/receive
reservation

13

Control capabilities

–

–

13.1

Numbering of terminals
No
Simple chair control using BAS No

Equipped
No

13.2

MLP facilities
[refer to ITU-T T series]

No

13.3

H.224 (simplex data)

Equipped

Equipped

14

Cascading

No

Equipped

14.1

Fixed rates (“simple”)

No

No

No

14.2

Master/Slave

No

Equipped

15

Terminal identification

No

Equipped

16

MBE capability Register
No
necessary information such as
the telephone number and index
number.

184

Multipoint Attribute

–

Chapter 9:
Videoconference
Using SIP

Restrictions on the use of the SIP software
• The settings of the Setup menu are invalid for SIP connection.
• Data transmission via the Data Solution Box is not possible during a
videoconference using SIP.
• The remote camera cannot be controlled during a videoconference using SIP.
• The whiteboard cannot be used during a videoconference using SIP.
• SIP connection cannot be established when “Encryption via LAN” is set to
“On”.
• The cascade connection using SIP is not supported even when the PCSA-SPI
SIP software has been installed in two Communication Terminals.

185

Chapter 9: Videoconference Using SIP

This chapter describes how to conduct a videoconference using SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol). SIP is a protocol to start communication via a network
standardized by IETP (Internet Engineering Task Force).
For conducting a videoconference with an IP phone using SIP, installation of
the optional PCSA-SP1 SIP software in the Communication Terminal and
connection via a SIP server are required.
Installation of the optional MCU software allows multipoint videoconference
with up to 5 IP phones.

Connection Examples for a
Videoconference Using SIP
Connection Example for Point-to-Point Videoconference
Connect the Communication Terminal in which the optional PCSA-SP1 SIP
software has been installed to an IP phone and a SIP server via a hub.

SIP server
PCS-1/1P
Hub
PCSA-SP1 SIP
software

LAN
TERMINAL

VISCA OUT

to LAN
AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

to 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
UTP cable (category 5, straight)
(not supplied)

186

to LAN

IP phone

WHITE
BOARD

Connection Examples for a Videoconference Using SIP

to LAN

Connection Examples for Multipoint Videoconference
Installation of the PCSA-SP1 SIP software and PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU
software in the Communication Terminal allows you to conduct a multipoint
videoconference among up to six points. By adding the PCS-320M1 H.320
MCU software, a multipoint videoconference with SIP and ISDN connections
mixed is also enabled.
SIP server

Hub

LAN
PCSA-SP1
to LAN
PCS-323M1

TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

IP phone

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
AUX

to LAN

VISCA OUT

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

to LAN

IR OUT
1

2

PCSASP1

to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T
UTP cable (category 5,
straight) (not supplied)

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

to 100BASETX/10BASE-T

Connection Examples for a Videoconference Using SIP

187

Chapter 9: Videoconference Using SIP

PCS-1/1P

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

PCS-B384 or PCS-B768
ISDN Unit
PCSA-SP1

ISDN

PCS-1/1P

SIP server

PCS-323M1

PCS-320M1
TERMINAL

AUDIO OUT

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

Hub

VISCA OUT

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

LAN

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

2

IP phone

to LAN

to LAN
to 100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T

to LAN
UTP cable (category 5,
straight) (not supplied)

PCSASP1

ON LINE

POWER

LAN ALERT

to 100BASETX/10BASE-T

Notes

• Cascade connection is not possible even if SIP software is installed in two or more
Communication Terminals.
• With SIP connection, the video mode cannot be automatically changed during a
conference. If a terminal with a different video mode from that of the previously
connected terminal participates in the conference, that terminal is regarded as a
secondary terminal and cannot receive video signals.

188

Connection Examples for a Videoconference Using SIP

Preparing for a Videoconference Using
SIP
Installing the SIP Software

1

Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
the off position (a).

2

Insert the “Memory Stick” containing the PCSA SP1 SIP software into the
Memory Stick slot.
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark facing
upward.

PCSA-SP1 SIP software

3

Set the power switch on the right side of the Communication Terminal to
the on position (@).
The SIP software is installed in the Communication Terminal.

Preparing for a Videoconference Using SIP

189

Chapter 9: Videoconference Using SIP

Notes on installing the SIP software
• You cannot install the software if the write-protect tab on the “Memory
Stick” in which the SIP software is stored is set to “LOCK”.
• Once the SIP software is installed in the Communication Terminal, the
software will not be used again.
• You cannot install the SIP software which is copied to another “Memory
Stick” with a computer, etc.

To check if the installation of the SIP software is completed
“SIP” is shown in “Software Option” of the Machine Information menu.
Machine Information
Host Version

VerX.XX

ISDN UNIT Version

VerX.XX

DSB Version

VerX.XX

DSP Version

VerX.XX

Software Option

SIP

Option I/F

DSB, ISDN UNIT

Host Name

PCS-1

IP Address

0.0.0.0

MAC Address

00-00-00-00-00-00

Serial Number

12345

End

For details on the Machine Information menu, see “Machine Information
Menu” on page 59.

Setting for SIP
You can set items regarding a videoconference using SIP in the SIP Setup
menu for the administrator.

1

Set “SIP Server Mode” to “On” on page 1 of the SIP Setup menu.
SIP Setup
Page: 1/2
SIP Server Mode

ISDN
On

Proxy Server Address

.

.

.

Registrar Address

.

.

.

SIP Domain

Save

2

190

Cancel

Enter “Proxy Server Address” and/or “Registrar Address”, and “SIP
Domain” for the SIP server.

Preparing for a Videoconference Using SIP

3

Enter “Registered User Name” and “Password” on page 2 of the SIP Setup
menu.
SIP Setup
Page: 2/2
Registered User Name

SIP1
ISDN

Password

****

Cancel

Note

On the Communication Terminal with the PCS-H.322M1 H.323 MCU software
installed, enter the user names and passwords for all the terminals to be connected for a
multipoint videoconference. Up to 5 terminals can be registered.

For details on the setting, see “SIP Setup Menu” on page 62.

Preparing for a Videoconference Using SIP

191

Chapter 9: Videoconference Using SIP

Save

Registering Remote Parties in the Phone Book
The basic procedure for registration is the same as the registration of a remote
party for a point-to-point videoconference.

1

Select “New Entry” in the Phone Book menu to display the List Edit menu,
then enter the name of the remote party in the Index text box.
For details on the procedure, see steps 1 to 3 of “Registering a New
Remote Party” on page 63.
List Edit
Index Jack
IP

IP
Line I/F
IP
LAN Bandwidth
1024 Kbps

Save

2

Cancel

Select “SIP” under “Line I/F”.
List Edit
Index Jack
IP

IP
Line I/F

IP
ISDN
LAN
ISDN (Telephone)
SIP

Save

Cancel

3

Enter the IP address of the remote party in the IP text box.

4

Select the line interface icon (SIP) or a still image to be displayed in the
Phone Book.

5

Select “Save”, then press the PUSH ENTER button on the Remote
Commander.
The registration in the Phone Book is completed.

192

Preparing for a Videoconference Using SIP

Starting a Videoconference Using SIP
Calling Remote Parties
To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book

1

Select “Phone Book” in the launcher menu, then press the PUSH ENTER
button.

2

Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote
party from the Phone Book, then press the PUSH ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Phone Book
RECENT

Recent
IP

TOKYO

Bob

John

0-9
A-I
J-S
T-Z

SIP

ISDN

IP

Jack

NEW YORK

PARIS

Dial

Jack
0.0.0.0

3

Edit
Copy
Delete

Use the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT
(
/ ) button on the Remote Commander.
The system begins dialing the party selected in step 2. “Dialing” appears on the
monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the Communication
Terminal blinks.
When the System connects to the system on the remote site, the message
“Meeting starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops
blinking and lights.

To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book
The basic procedure is the same as that for a normal point-to-point
videoconference.
For details of the procedure, see “To call a remote party not registered in the
Phone Book” of “Calling a Remote Party” on page 74.

1

Select “Dial” in the launcher menu to display the Dial menu.

Starting a Videoconference Using SIP

193

Chapter 9: Videoconference Using SIP

The Phone Book menu appears.

2

Select “SIP” under “Line I/F”.
Dial

Line I/F

IP

LAN
IP
ISDN
LAN Bandwidth:
ISDN (2B)
1024 Kbps
ISDN(Telephone)
SIP

A2
B1
B2

More Options

3

Dial

Save

Enter the address of a remote party in the IP text box.
The format of the address may be the following:

• 4000 (number assigned by the SIP server)
• 4000@sip.com
• 192.168.1.1 (IP address)

4

Select “Dial”, then press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the
CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote Commander.
The system begins dialing the party entered in step 3. “Dialing” appears on the
monitor screen, and the ON LINE indicator (blue) on the Communication
Terminal blinks.
When the System connects to the system on the remote site, the message
“Meeting starts!” appears on the screen, and the ON LINE indicator stops
blinking and lights.

To dial the remote parties for a multipoint videoconference one by one
After staring communication with the remote party selected first, press the
CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
/ ) button on the Remote Commander to
open the submenu.
Disconnect

Phone Book

Dial

Cancel

Select “Phone Book” or “Dial” depending on the registration status of the next
remote party.
Select “Phone Book”, then perform steps 2 and 3 of the procedure shown in
“To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book” on page 193, or select
“Dial”, then perform steps 2 to 4 of the procedure in “To call a remote party
not registered in the Phone Book” on page 193.
Repeat this procedure for each remote party.

194

Starting a Videoconference Using SIP

Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
Operations are the same as those for a point-to-point conference.
For details, see “Receiving a Call from a Remote Party” on page 82.

Ending a Videoconference
To end a point-to-point videoconference
Press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
Commander.

/

) button on the Remote

The message “Disconnect?” appears on the monitor screen.

2

Press the V or v button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”, then
press the PUSH ENTER button, or press the CONNECT/DISCONNECT
(
/ ) button again.

To end a multipoint videoconference
Operations are the same as th.ose in Chapter 8, “Ending the Multipoint
Videoconference” on page 178.

Starting a Videoconference Using SIP

195

Chapter 9: Videoconference Using SIP

1

e Power switch

Appendix

Turns on/off the Communication
Terminal. The power is on when the
switch is set to the @ side and off when
the switch is set to the a side.

Location and
Function of Parts
and Controls

f AUX CONTROL connector (D-sub
9-pin)
Used for service.

Rear

PCS-P1/P1P Communication
Terminal

12 3 4 5 6

AUDIO OUT

Front/Right side

AUX1–VIDEO IN–AUX2

AUDIO IN

CAMERA UNIT

MIC

ISDN UNIT

(PLUG IN POWER)
1
2

WHITE
BOARD

(MIXED)
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T

VIDEO OUT
AUX

MAIN– MONITOR– SUB

RGB OUT

DC 19.5V

DSB

IR OUT
1

12 3

POWER

2

4
q; qa qs

ON LINE

7 89

qd

qf qg

qh

qj

qk

LAN ALERT

a AUDIO OUT (MIXED) jack (phono
jack)

5

6

a ON LINE indicator
Blinks during dialing or answering and
lights in blue when connection is
completed. It turns off when the system
is disconnected.

b POWER indicator
Lights in green when the power switch is
set to on (@). Lights in orange when the
Communication Terminal is set to
standby mode.

Used when recording the sound to
minute a conference. The mixed sounds
of a local and remote parties are output
from this jack.

b AUDIO OUT jack (phono jack)
Connect to the audio input of the TV
monitor.

c VIDEO IN AUX 1 connector (mini
DIN 4-pin)
Connect to the video output of external
video equipment.

d VIDEO IN AUX 2 jack (phono jack)
Connect to the video output of external
video equipment.

c LAN ALERT indicator
Lights in yellow when packet error
(loss) or link error occurs during
communication.

d Memory Stick slot
Insert a “Memory Stick” (not supplied)
into this slot.

196

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

e AUDIO IN jack (phono jack)
Connect to the audio output of the
optional VCR or audio equipment.

f CAMERA UNIT connector
Connect to the TERMINAL connector
on the rear of the Camera.

g MIC1/MIC2 (PLUG IN POWER)
jacks (minijack)
Connect to the optional PCS-A1 or PCSA300 microphone. Power is supplied to
the microphone from the
Communication Terminal.

h ISDN UNIT connector
Connect to the TERMINAL connector
on the optional PCS-B384 or PCS-B768
ISDN Unit.

p DSB connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Connect to the TERMINAL connector
on the optional PCS-DSB1 Data
Solution Box.

q DC 19.5V jack
Connect the supplied PCS-AC195 AC
power adaptor.

r U (ground) terminal
Connect a ground wire.

i WHITE BOARD connector
Connect to the optional mimio Xi.

PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit

j VIDEO OUT AUX jack (phono)
Front

1

k VIDEO OUT MONITOR MAIN
connector (mini DIN 4-pin)
Connect to the S-video input on the TV
monitor or VCR.

l VIDEO OUT MONITOR SUB
connector (mini DIN 4-pin)
Connect to the S-video input on the
second TV monitor when the system
uses the dual monitor mode.

3
2

4
5
Rear

m RGB OUT connector (D-sub 15pin)
Connect to the RGB input of the
optional projector or display unit.
TERMINAL

VISCA OUT

6

7

n IR OUT 1/2 jacks (minijack)
Connect the supplied IR repeater.
Connect the IR repeater for the monitor
connected to the VIDEO OUT
MONITOR MAIN connector to the IR
OUT 1 jack, and the IR repeater for the
monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT
MONITOR SUB connector to the IR
OUT 2 jack.

Bottom

8

o 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector
(8-pin modular)
Used to conduct a conference via a LAN
or using SIP. Connect to a hub or a SIP
server using the category 5 cable.
Location and Function of Parts and Controls

197

Appendix

Connect to the video input of the TV
monitor or VCR.

a Lens

PCS-R1 Remote Commander

b Microphone
c POWER indicator (green)
Lights when the power switch on the
Communication Terminal is set to on
and goes out when it is set to off or the
Terminal is set to standby mode.

d Remote sensor
Point the Remote Commander to the
sensor when operating this System.

MIC
ON/OFF

VOLUME

ZOOM

DISPLAY

VIDEOINPUT
SELECT

CLEAR

FAR/NEAR
ALPHA/
NUM

e Infrared sensor
Receives the infrared wireless signal
from the optional PCS-DS150
Document Stand. The received signal is
used as object input.

SYMBOL

PinP
BACK
SPACE

PUSH
ENTER
RETURN

MENU

CONNECT/
DISCONNECT

f TERMINAL connector
Connect to the CAMERA UNIT
connector on the Communication
Terminal.

g VISCA OUT connector

HELP

h Tripod hole
Use to attach the camera on a tripod.

PCS-R1

You can set for a beep not to sound by
pressing the button on the Remote
Commander with the Audio Setup menu.
For the setting, see “Audio Setup Menu” on
page 48.

a MIC ON/OFF button
Cuts off the local sound to be sent to a
remote party. To restore the sound, press
the button again.

b VOLUME +/– button
Adjusts the volume of the sound
received from a remote party.
+: to increase the volume
–: to decrease the volume

198

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

c DISPLAY (CLEAR) button
Switches the picture displayed on the
monitor screen.
Deletes a line when used for character
input.

d PinP (BACK SPACE) button
Displays a window picture when pressed
during communication.
Each time you press this button, the
location of the window picture changes.
Pressing the button displays the picture
in full screen while the Camera menu
opens.
When used for character input, deletes
the character you entered last.

Used to select the menu or make various
settings in the menu. Also used for
camera angle adjustment.

f RETURN button
Used to return to the previous layer in
the menu.

g PUSH ENTER button
Executes the selection or setting in the
menu and goes to the next layer.

h Number (0-9,

,

Selects the video input signal. Each time
you press the button, the input signal
switches.
Used to enter a symbol for character
input.

l FAR/NEAR (ALPHA/NUM) button
Switches the picture on a local or remote
site.
Switches the input mode between
alphabets and numerals for character
input.

m MENU button
Used to display a menu.

n CONNECT/DISCONNECT (
) button

/

Used to connect or disconnect a remote
party for a conference.

o HELP button
Used to show the help guide.

p Battery compartment (rear)
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries.

) buttons

Used to enter the letters or numerals of a
telephone number, etc.
Used for focus, brightness and backlight
compensation adjustments.

i @/1 (power on/off) button
Sets the Communication Terminal to
standby mode when it is turned on.
Turns on the Communication Terminal
when it is in standby.

j ZOOM (T/W) buttons
Zooms in or out.
T: to enlarge the picture
W: to reduce the picture

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

199

Appendix

e Arrow buttons (V/v/B/b)

k VIDEO INPUT SELECT
(SYMBOL) button

PCS-B384 ISDN Unit
(Optional)

PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
(Optional)

Front/Upper panel

Front/Upper panel

1
1

2

1
3

1

2

3

STATUS

2

1

2

4

5

6

STATUS

2

3

1

3

2

3

4

5

6

3

Rear

Rear

4

a STATUS indicator
Lights in orange when power is supplied
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is
complete, blinks in green.

b STATUS 1-3 indicators

4

a STATUS indicator
Lights in orange when power is supplied
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is
complete, blinks in green.

b STATUS 1-6 indicators

Lights in orange when link
synchronization of each ISDN connector
is established. Lights in yellow when
each ISDN line is connected.

Lights in orange when link
synchronization of each ISDN connector
is established. Lights in yellow when
each ISDN line is connected.

c ISDN 1-3 terminals (8-pin modular
jack)

c ISDN 1-6 terminals (8-pin modular
jack)

Connect to the ISDN lines using the
ISDN modular cable.

Connect to the ISDN lines using the
ISDN modular cable.

d TERMINAL connector
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector
on the Communication Terminal with
the interface cable supplied with the
ISDN Unit.

200

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

d TERMINAL connector
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector
on the Communication Terminal with
the interface cable supplied with the
ISDN Unit.

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box
(Optional)
Front/Upper panel
1

2

RGB A

RGB SELECT

Connects to the optional CTE-600
Communication Transducer.

3
RGB B

h MIC 1–MIC 5 jacks (minijack)

RGB IN A

RGB IN B

4

5

Connect to the optional PCS-A1 or PCSA300 microphone.

i TERMINAL connector (D-sub 15pin)

6

AUX

7

IN

MIC 1

MIC 2

MIC 3

8

MIC 4

MIC 5

TERMINAL

9

RGB OUT

q;

Connect to the DSB connector on the
Communication Terminal using the
interface cable supplied with the Data
Solution Box.

j RGB OUT connector (D-sub 15pin)
Outputs the video signal to a projector,
TV monitor, etc.

a RGB A input select button and
indicator
Selects the video input from the video
equipment connected to the RGB IN A
connector.

b SEND button and indicator
Sends the selected input picture to the
Communication Terminal.

c RGB B input select button and
indicator
Selects the video input from the video
equipment connected to the RGB IN B
connector.

d RGB IN A connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Connects to the RGB output connector
on a computer, etc.

e RGB IN B connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Connect to the RGB output connector on
a computer, etc.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

201

Appendix

Rear
OUT

Connect to the audio input jack on the
active speaker, etc.
Outputs monaural sound.

g AUX IN/OUT jacks (phono jack)

SEND

LINE OUT

f LINE OUT jack (stereo minijack)

On Screen Messages
Check the following if a message appears on the TV monitor when operating
the Communication Terminal.
Message

Meaning

Incorrect dialing setup.

Make sure the selected entry is correctly registered.

CANNOT COMPLETE CONNECTION
(The following code and message appear.)

—

0

Unknown network error:

Try again later.

1

Number does not exist:

Check the number and try again.

2,3,6

Network congestion:

Try again later.

16

Normal disconnection:

(The line has been disconnected normally.)

17

Line is busy:

Try again later.

18,19 System not responding:

Check if the remote system is connected.

20

No such subscriber

Confirm the site number..

21

Call rejected:

Check if the remote system is connected.

22

Called party number changed:

Check the number and try again.

26

Connection restoration request:

Try again later.

27

Remote system out of order:

Check if the remote system is operational.

28

Invalid number entered:

Check the number and try again.

31, 34, 41 – 44, 47
Network not available:

Try again later.

50

Check the remote party’s facility contract.

Not a Subscriber:

57,58 Bearer capability not authorized:

Check if “Restrict” is set correctly.

70

Restricted capability:

Set “Restrict” to “56K” and try again.

88

Terminal attribute error:

Check the connection of the remote system.

91, 95 – 102, 111
Protocol error:

Turn off and restart the system and try again.

128

H.221 negotiation timeout:

Turn off and restart the system and try again.

132

Invalid SPID:

Reregister the SPID.

134

Physical link synchronization
error:

Check the connection of the ISDN cable.

144, 145
Bonding negotiation timeout:

Turn off and restart the system and try again.

177

LAN connection timeout:

Try again later.

178

LAN connection rejected:

Try again later.

179

DNS error:

Please check DNS.

202

On Screen Messages

Message

Meaning

180

Dialing your own number is
invalid.

181

GateKeeper error.

Please check the IP address of the remote party.
Please check the IP address of the remote party.

Busy line - Connection not possible.

The telephone line of the remote party is busy and
cannot be connected.

Far end inactive

The remote party operates the menu, and the still
picture cannot be sent.

System not responding.

Check if the remote system is connected.
Close the menu when starting a conference.

Cannot establish all connections

Check the telephone number of the remote party.

Connection time out.

Wait for a while and then try dialing again.

Communication error

Wait for a while and then try dialing again.

Configuration error

Wait for a while and then try dialing again.

MCU operation rejected.

The function is not available when external MCU is
connected.

Corrupted data stream-Terminating
connection.

A signal error occurred. The line connections are
compelled to be disconnected.

Memory full

The memory capacity of the “Memory Stick” is
full.

Input title

Input an index title.

Operation disabled

—

Wrong password

The password is not correct.
Enter the correct password.

01H LAN configuration error
(IP address)

The IP address is not proper.

02H LAN configuration error
(Netmask)

The netmask is not proper.

03H LAN configuration error
(MAC address)

The MAC address is not proper.

04H LAN configuration error
(DHCP error)

The IP address and netmask cannot be obtained.

05H Gatekeeper registration error

The setting of the Gatekeeper is not proper.

06H SNMP error

SNMP is not set properly.

LAN configuration error
(Gatekeeper)

The setting of the Gatekeeper is not proper.

LAN configuration error
(SNMP error)

The setting of the SNMP is not proper.

LAN configuration error

The settings in the LAN Setup menu are not proper.

Memory Stick error.

The format of the “Memory Stick” is wrong.

General error.

–
On Screen Messages

203

Appendix

Close this menu to connect line

Message

Meaning

No Memory Stick.

Insert a “Memory Stick”.

Memory Stick write-protected.

Release the lock of the erasure prevention switch
on the “Memory Stick”.

Memory full.

The data has been saved in the “Memory Stick” to
its full capacity.

Memory Stick file error.

The file format of the “Memory Stick” is incorrect
or abnormal.

Memory Stick file decode error.

Decoding the JPEG file has failed.

Memory Stick size error.

The file size of the “Memory Stick” is not
acceptable.

There are no images recorded in the
Memory Stick.

No images are recorded in the “Memory Stick”.

File error.

There is an abnormality in the file.

File size error.

The file size is not acceptable.

File decode error.

Decoding the JPEG file has failed.

Format error.

The “Memory Stick” cannot be formatted.

Settings cannot be changed during
communication.

Change the setting after disconnecting the system.

The still images were not sent.

Transmission of the still images has failed.

The presentation screen can not be sent.

Transmission of the RGB data from the Data
Solution Box has failed.

Multipoint connection to this participant was Multipoint connection with this party is not
not made.
available.
The LAN cannot be used.

You cannot use the LAN connection.

The DATA SOLUTION BOX cannot be
used.

You cannot use the Data Solution Box connected.

Unknown device is connected.

An unacceptable device is connected to the WHITE
BOARD connector.

ISDN UNIT is not available.

Communication with the ISDN unit cannot be
made.

No more cascade connections are enabled.

Installing the MCU software into three or more
Communication Terminals does not allow cascade
connection.

Cascade connection via ISDN is not
available.

You cannot use cascade connection when your
system is connected via ISDN.

Cannot send RGB data while receiving.

While you are receiving an RGB picture from
another terminal, you cannot send an RGB picture
from equipment connected to the Data Solution
Box.

A still image is being sent or received. The
Data Solution Box is not usable.

While you are sending or receiving a still image,
you cannot send or receive the RGB picture via the
Data Solution Box.

204

On Screen Messages

Message

Meaning

Connection with the Data Solution Box is
not correct. Please reset the system.

Connection between the Communication Terminal
and the Data Solution Box is not correct. Turn off
the Communication Terminal, then turn it on again.

Fan in the Data Solution Box does not work
properly. The Data Solution Box is not
usable.

The fan equipped with the Data Solution Box is
not working properly. You cannot use the Data
Solution Box.

The Whiteboard cannot be used.

The whiteboard can be used for a videoconference
only between PCS-1/1P systems.

Battery in the stylus could be weak. Replace The battery in the stylus for the whiteboard is low.
the battery.
Replace the battery in the stylus with a new one.
When conducting an encrypted videoconference
via LAN, you cannot connect to the system that is
not compatible with the encryption via LAN
feature.

The encryption feature on a far-end system
is disabled.

When conducting an encrypted videoconference
via LAN, you cannot connect to the system if the
encryption via LAN feature is deactivated.

The encryption feature on a far-end system
is enabled.

When conducting a daily conference, you cannot
connect to the system if the encryption via LAN
feature is activated.

The entered password for the encryption
feature is not correct.

Enter the correct password.

The encrypted videoconference is not
available if any terminal is connected via
ISDN.

While the videoconference is held via the ISDN
connection, you cannot connect any terminal via
the LAN connection if your encryption via LAN
feature is activated.

At least thirteen characters are required as a
password for the encryption feature.

You have to enter 13 to 20 characters, numerals or
symbols as the password required for conduct of an
encrypted videoconference via LAN.

PPPoE connection has failed.

LAN connection has failed. Check the PPPoE
setting.

PPPoE server admission has failed.

Access to a network is not admitted by the PPPoE
server.

Connection to the PPPoE server fails.

Check the DNS server setting.

Communication via LAN is not available.
Check the LAN cable.

The connection to a LAN cannot be made. Check
the LAN cable.

An IP address is not obtained via DHCP.

Check the DHCP setting.

Please dial by entering the IP address.

Be sure to enter the IP address of the remote party
when dialing.

Reference to DNS has failed.

The LAN connection has failed as you entered the
user name when using the domain name server.
Enter the IP address.

Your system attempts to connect to other
equipment than a videoconferencing system.

Connect your system to the videoconferencing
system.

On Screen Messages

205

Appendix

The far-end system is not compatible with
the encryption feature.

Message

Meaning

Some trouble occurs during connection.
Connection has failed.

Try to connect again.

Check the information registered to the
gatekeeper.

When you use the gatekeeper mode, the registered
information on gatekeeper appears in Page 2/2 of
the LAN Setup menu.

Connection has been rejected as the data
exceeds the bandwidth of a gatekeeper.

Connection has failed as the data exceeds the
bandwidth of a gatekeeper.

Gatekeeper does not respond.

Check the gatekeeper setting.

The ISDN Unit is not connected.

The ISDN Unit is not connected.

The ISDN line is invalid. Check the ISDN
connection.

Check the ISDN connection.

ISDN lines are not connected correctly.

Check the ISDN connection.

Check the ISDN configuration.

Check the settings in the ISDN Setup menu.

A telephone number of a remote party has
not been entered.

Enter the telephone number of the remote party.

The entered telephone number of a remote
party is not correct.

Enter the correct telephone number of the remote
party.

Problems connecting to a router or an ISDN The ISDN connection has not been made. There
connection.
may be some problem in a router or in the ISDN
connection on the remote party.
Line is busy. Try to dial again later.

Line is busy. Wait for a while and try dialing again.

A line has not been completely connected.
The far-end videoconferencing system did
not respond to our calling.

The videoconferencing system does not respond to
the calling, and the connection has failed.

The terminal with the specified IP address
does not exist, or the system is turned off.

The connection to the remote party cannot be
made. You may specify a different IP address from
that of the terminal or the system of the remote
party is turned off.

Connection rejected.

The connection to the remote party has failed.

Call not responded.

The remote party does not respond to your calling.

H.245 Error.

Error occurs while connecting to the multiple
points via LAN.

The remote terminal may not be compatible
with the BONDING function.

The BONDING function may not be used. The
remote terminal may not be equipped with this
function.

The ISDN telephone number of the local
party is not correctly set. Set it correctly.

Set your ISDN telephone number correctly.

The ISDN telephone number of the far-end
party may be configured incorrectly.

The ISDN telephone number of the remote party
may not be set correctly.

6B connection is available.

Connection has been made via 6B. More channel
connection than 6B is not available.

206

On Screen Messages

Meaning

PPPoE server admission has failed. Check
the PPPoE User Name and Password are
entered correctly.

LAN connection using PPPoE has failed.
Enter the correct user name and password.

LAN configuration error. Fixed IP for
PPPoE is set to On. Check the Fixed IP for
PPPoE is entered correctly.

This system is set to use a fixed IP for a PPPoE
connection. Enter the Fixed IP for PPPoE correctly
in the LAN Setup menu.

PPPoE server admission fails. Dial again
after confirmation of the PPPoE settings.

Check the PPPoE settings are complete in the LAN
Setup menu, then try to dial again.

Access to the DNS server has failed. Check
the PPPoE DNS settings.

Check that the PPPoE DNS settings in the LAN
Setup menu are correct.

Connection to the remote party via DNS
disabled. Dial using IP address.

Enter the IP address of the remote party when
dialing.

Now obtaining an IP address via DHCP.

The IP address of your system is assigned
automatically by the DHCP server.

LAN configuration error. Unauthorized IP
address is set.

The set IP address cannot be used. Set the correct
IP address again.

LAN configuration error. Unauthorized
network mask is set.

The set network mask cannot be used. Set the
correct network mask again.

Cannot access the DNS server. Use the IP
address to dial.

Connection to the remote party using the domain
name cannot be made. Enter the IP address of the
remote party for dialing.

Configure the DNS address or use the IP
address to dial.

Set the DNS address or enter the IP address of the
remote party for dialing.

Check the user name or user number for
dialing is correct.

Enter the user name or user number of the remote
party correctly.

The remote terminal may not be registered in Contact the gatekeeper administrator for
gatekeeper. Contact the gatekeeper
registration status of the remote party in gatekeeper.
administrator.
Gatekeeper does not respond. Contact the
gatekeeper administrator, or use the IP
address to dial.

Connection using the user name and user number
has failed. Contact the gatekeeper administrator, or
dial using the IP address.

LAN configuration error. Gatekeeper Mode
is set to On. Enter the gatekeeper address.

LAN connection is set to use the gatekeeper. Enter
the gatekeeper address.

LAN configuration error. NAT Mode is set
to On. Check the NAT address.

LAN connection is set to use NAT. Check the NAT
address in the LAN Setup menu.

LAN configuration error. Unauthorized NAT The set NAT address cannot be used. Enter the
address is specified. Check the NAT address. correct NAT address in the LAN Setup menu.
LAN configuration error. Different address
from NAT machines is specified. Check the
NAT address.

Enter the correct NAT address in the LAN Setup
menu.

LAN configuration error. Connection is not
complete as the port number overlaps.

Check the TCP and UDP port numbers in the LAN
Setup menu.

On Screen Messages

207

Appendix

Message

Message

Meaning

LAN configuration error. Connection is not
complete as an invalid port number is
specified.

Check the TCP and UDP port numbers in the LAN
Setup menu.

Line is busy. Try to dial again later.

Connection has filed as the line is busy. Try to dial
again later.

Local number is not set correctly in the
ISDN Setup menu. Set it correctly. Line
connected with 1B (64K).

ISDN line has been connected with 1B (64K)
channel. Set the local numbers correctly in the
ISDN Setup menu.

Local number setting for ISDN
ISDN line has been connected with 1B (64K)
configuration may not be correct in the
channel. The local numbers may not be correctly
remote party. Line connected with 1B (64K). set in the remote party.
H.221 negotiation timeout. Restart the
system and connect again.

Turn off your system, turn it on and try to dial
again.

Dialing the same address is invalid.

You are calling the same party.

The ISDN lines fully occupied. Check
Number of Lines in the Multipoint Setup
menu, or check whether the ISDN cable is
disconnected.

Check the number of ISDN lines is correctly set in
the Multipoint Setup menu, or check the ISDN
cable connection.

Regarded as a secondary terminal as the
number of lines for ISDN configuration is
different.

Some functions may be limited as your system is
regarded as secondary terminal.

Regarded as a secondary terminal as Far End Some functions may be limited as your system is
Camera Control is set to Off.
regarded as secondary terminal.
Check the line interface or the IP address is
set correctly.

Select the line interface correctly or enter the
correct IP address.

Dial setup error. No prefix number is
entered.

The prefix is not registered in the Dial Setup menu.

Dial setup error. No prefix number for LAN The prefix is not registered in the Dial Setup menu.
is entered.
LAN configuration error. PPPoE is set to
On. Check the PPPoE User Name and
Password.

PPPoE is set for LAN connection. Configuration of
the user name and password is required.

LAN configuration error. IP Precedence
exceeds the maximum value.

Set the IP Precedence value between 0 and 7 in the
LAN Setup menu.

LAN configuration error. Diffserve exceeds
the maximum value.

Set the Diffserve value between 0 and 64 in the
LAN Setup menu.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Parameter error.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the SIP
configuration is not correct. Check the settings in
the SIP Setup menu.

Connection using SIP is not available.
System call error.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as this
System has a problem.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Memory over.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the
memory of this system is fully occupied.

208

On Screen Messages

Meaning

Connection using SIP is not available.
Initialization error.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the
initialization has failed. Check the setting.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Unauthorized handle.

Connection using SIP cannot be made due to
internal error.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Maximum sessions over.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the
number of sites connected has been exceeded.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Server internal error.

Connection using SIP cannot be made due to
internal error of the SIP server.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Provisional response timeout.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as there is no
response from the remote party for a certain period
of time.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Request timeout.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as there is no
response to our call from the remote party for a
certain period of time.

Connection using SIP is not available. 4xx
response received.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as, for
example, the remote party uses a media that is not
supported by this System.

Connection using SIP is not available. 5xx
response received.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as an error
occurs in the SIP server, etc. Check the SIP server.

Connection using SIP is not available. 6xx
response received.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as, for
example, the remote party cannot be found. Check
the address of the remote party.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Undefined error.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as
unexpected error occurs.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Unauthorized status.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as
unexpected error occurs.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Canceled by the remote site.

Connection using SIP is not possible as the remote
party has been made a call, then cancelled.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Disconnected by the remote site.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the
remote party cancels your call.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Rejection received.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the
remote party rejects your call.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Network error.

Connection using SIP cannot be made due to
network problem. Check the network status.

Connection using SIP is not available.
Encrypted conference via LAN not
available.

Connection using SIP cannot be made if encryption
feature is enabled. Set Encryption via LAN to Off.

Connection using SIP is not available. Line
is busy.

Connection using SIP cannot be made as the
remote party has been connected to another.

On Screen Messages

209

Appendix

Message

The following messages indicate the state of the system. No action is required.
Message

Meaning

Meeting starts!

Connection with the remote party has been completed, and
you can now start a conference.

Starting connection.

After receiving a call from the remote party the system starts
connecting.

Meeting ends.

Operations for ending the conference have been completed.

Please wait.

The data is being saved.

Installation completed.

Installing the software is completed.

The still image has been sent.

A still picture has been transmitted to the remote party.

Still image transmission
cancelled.

Transmission of a still image has been cancelled.

Preset 1 (–6) selected.

The camera angle and zoom setting has been changed to that
registered in Preset number 1 (–6).

Still image saved to Memory
Stick.

The still image has been saved to the “Memory Stick”.

Registered to Preset number 1 (–
6).

The camera angle and zoom setting has been registered in
Preset number 1 (–6).

Terminal A (or B, C, D, E) has
disconnected.

During a multipoint videoconference the remote party A (or
B, C, D, E) has been disconnected.

Site A (or B, C, D, E) has
disconnected.

During a multipoint videoconference the remote party A (or
B, C, D, E) has ended the conference.

The still image from the object
input has been transmitted.

The still image input from the Document Stand has been
transmitted.

The slide show is over.

The slide show has been ended.

The 1st (–5th) position has been
selected.

The terminal on the 1st (–5th) site for a multipoint
videoconference has been selected from the Phone Book.

The terminal participated in the
conference.

The remote party of the displayed terminal participates in the
multipoint videoconference.

The terminal has dropped out of
the conference.

The displayed terminal ends the multipoint videoconference.

Viewing the terminal. [Terminal
name]

The picture of the displayed terminal can be seen on the
screen.

Now upgrading. Wait for a while. The software is now upgrading. Be sure not to turn off the
Be sure not to turn off your system Communication Terminal until the upgrading is complete.
while upgrading.
Doing so may cause malfunction of the system.
Cascade connection is complete.

Cascade connection with the terminals has been completed.

Cascade connection has been
Cascade connection with the terminals has been made. You
made. Split mode is not available. cannot display split windows.
Use of the Private Phone Book is
available.

210

On Screen Messages

The “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is
registered has been inserted into the Communication
Terminal. You can use the Private Phone Book.

Message

Meaning

Use of the Private Phone Book is
not available.

The “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone Book is
registered has been removed from the Communication
Terminal. You cannot use the Private Phone Book.

The system is connecting to a
LAN via PPPoE.

The Video Communication System is connecting to a LAN
using PPPoE.

Appendix

On Screen Messages

211

Troubleshooting
If the Communication Terminal does not function correctly, check the following.
Symptom

Cause

Solution

The power is not
turned on.

The power switch is not set to on.

Set the power switch to on (@) (page
26).

The batteries in the Remote
Commander are low or dead.

Replace the batteries with new ones
(page 24).

The fan inside the Terminal stops.

Turn off the system immediately and
consult with Sony dealer.

Three indicators on
the front of the
Communication
Terminal blink.

No sound or the
The volume of the System is too
volume is very low. low.

Adjust the sound volume by pressing
the VOLUME +/– buttons on the
Remote Commander (page 29).

The volume of the TV monitor is
too low.

Adjust the volume of the TV monitor.

The microphone on the remote
party is turned off.

Ask the remote party to turn on the
microphone.

“Mic Select” is not set properly.

Set up “Mic Select” properly
according to the microphone to be
used (page 48).

Audio input is not selected
properly.

Set up “Input Select” properly (page
48).

The microphone or external
equipment is not connected
correctly.

Check the connection (pages 118, 123
and 133).

Picture is blurred.

Manual focus is selected but picture Adjust the focus (page 90).
remains blurred.
When auto focus is selected, the
Select manual focus and adjust
background is too bright, contrast is manually (page 91).
too high, or the background or the
participants’ clothes contain fine
line patterns.

212

Troubleshooting

Symptom

Cause

Solution

No picture.

The selected picture source is not
tuned on.

Turn on the selected video equipment.

Video input is not selected properly. Select the video input with the
VIDEO INPUT SELECT button
(page 95).

No connection.

The selected picture source is not
correctly connected to the System.

Check the connections (page 123).

A voice meeting is held.

This is not a malfunction.

Movement of the camera is
prevented.

Turn off the Communication
Terminal, then turn it on again.
Check the entered number.

The setting of “Line I/F” is not
correct.

Set “Line I/F” to correct interface
referring to “Calling a Remote Party”
(page 74).

The registered items in the Phone
Book are not correct.

Register the party correctly referring
to “Registering a Remote Party –
Phone Book” (page 63).

Troubleshooting

213

Appendix

Wrong number was dialed.

Symptom

Cause

Solution

No connection.

Some of the system settings are not Set the system settings correctly
correct.
referring to “Registering Local
Information” (page 39).
The IP address and network mask
are not set correctly (when using
LAN).

Ask the system administrator to set
them correctly (page 53).

The LAN or ISDN cable is
disconnected.

Connect correctly (pages 22, 23).

The LAN or ISDN cable is
connected to the incorrect
connector.

Connect correctly (pages 22, 23).

The LAN or ISDN cable is down.

Replace the cable with a new one.

The cable exclusively designed for
the ISDN connection is used for
LAN connection (when using
LAN).

Use the cable for LAN connection.

Incorrect type of cable (cross or
straight cable) is used for the LAN
or ISDN connection.

Use the correct type of cable.

The DSU is turned off.

Turn on the DSU.

If you disconnect the
Turn off the power of the system and
communication with an abnormal
wait for a few minutes before turning
procedure, e.g., unplugging an
it on again.
ISDN cable or turning off the
system during communication, you
may not connect to the ISDN line
for a while (when using ISDN).
If you repeat plugging/unplugging
or turning on/off, you may not
connect to the network for a while
(when using LAN).

Turn off the power of the system and
wait for a few minutes before turning
it on again.

LAN connection timeout (when
using LAN).

Try again later.

Packet for videoconferencing is not Consult with the system administrator
acceptable under the current LAN so that the packet for
environment (when using LAN).
videoconferencing becomes
acceptable under your LAN
environment.

214

The remote terminal is not turned
on.

Ask the remote party to turn on the
terminal.

It takes a long time for the remote
party to be able to answer from the
standby mode.

Ask the remote party to cancel the
standby mode.

The remote party is in
communication with another party.

Call the remote party after they end
the communication with another
party.

Troubleshooting

Symptom

Cause

Solution

No connection.

Answering the call is not permitted Ask the remote party to permit
by the remote terminal as it is
answering a call.
operating for setups, etc.
Ask the remote party to set the
terminal to auto answer mode, or to
answer a call manually.

The ISDN telephone numbers are
not set up in the remote terminal
(when using bonding).

Ask the remote party to set up “Area
Code” and “Local Number” in the
ISDN Setup menu correctly (page
55).

The eighth digit and up of the ISDN
telephone numbers are not the same
when connecting using bonding
(when the remote party uses the
videoconference system of an older
model such as the PCS-1600).

Connect without using bonding, or
use the ISDN telephone numbers that
are the same in the eighth digit and
up.

There is some problem with the
remote terminal.

Try to dial the number of another
terminal.

A message appears on the screen.

See “On Screen Messages” (page
202).

Still pictures or the The write-protect tab on the
Phone Book cannot “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
be saved to the
The “Memory Stick” has already
“Memory Stick.”
been recorded to full capacity.

Appendix

The remote terminal is not set to
auto answer mode.

Release the lock (page 105).
Use another “Memory Stick.”

Troubleshooting

215

48 Kbps, 56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.722
compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
64 Kbps, 96 Kbps (MPEG4
Audio) (when using LAN)
24 Kbps, 32 Kbps (G.722.1
compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation) (when using
LAN)
16 Kbps (G.728 compliant with
ITU-T Recommendation)
8 Kbps (G.729 compliant with
ITU-T Recommendation)
(when using LAN)
5.3 Kbps, 6.3 Kbps (G.723.1
compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation) (when using
LAN)

Specifications
PCS-P1/P1P Communication
Terminal
This unit is compliant with ITU-T
Recommendations H.320 and H.323.

Motion picture
Operating bandwidth
64 Kbps to 1920 Kbps (standard,
LAN connection)
56 Kbps to 384 Kbps (when
installing the PCS-B384, ISDN
connection)
56 Kbps to 768 Kbps (when
installing the PCS-B768, ISDN
connection)
Coding
H.261/H.263/H.263+/H.263++/
H.264/Interlaced SIF (ITU-T
Recommendation)
MPEG4 Simple Profile (when
using LAN)
Picture elements
CIF: 352 pixels × 288 lines
QCIF: 176 pixels × 144 lines
Color system
NTSC (PCS-P1)
PAL (PCS-P1P)
Capable of connection between
both color systems

Still Picture
Pixels
Encoding

704 pixels × 480 lines (PCS-P1)
704 pixels × 576 lines (PCS-P1P)
H.261 (ITU-T Recommendation)
Annex. D (4CIF)
H.263 (special format of this
system)

Sound
Bandwidth

14 kHz (MPEG4 Audio)
7 kHz (G.722/G.722.1 compliant
with ITU-T Recommendation)
3.4 kHz (G.711/G.723.1/G.728/
G.729 compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
Transmission rate
56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.711
compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)

216

Specifications

Network
Multiplexing
Video, audio, data
Frame format
H.221 (compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
Interface
LAN (standard), 64 Kbps to 1920
Kbps
ISDN (BRI), up to 3 lines (when
installing the PCS-B384)
up to 6 lines (when installing the
PCS-B768)
Data transmission rate
LSD 1.2 Kbps, 4.8 Kbps, 6.4 Kbps
MLP 6.4 Kbps, 24 Kbps, 32 Kbps
HMLP 62.4 Kbps, 64 Kbps, 128
Kbps
LAN protocol supported
HTTP
FTP
Telnet
RTP/RTCP
TCP/UDP

Remote control
Far end camera control
H.281 (compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
Data transfer
T.120 (compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)

General
Power requirements
19.5 V
Power consumption
3.5 A

PCS-C1/C1P Camera Unit
Video signal
NTSC color, EIA standards (PCSC1)
PAL color, CCIR standards (PCSC1P)
Image device

Lens

1/4 type CCD (Charge Coupled
Device)
Approx. 410 000 pixels (Effective:
approx. 380 000 pixels) (PCSC1)
Approx. 470 000 pixels (Effective:
approx. 440 000 pixels) (PCSC1P)
f = 3.1 to 31 mm, F 1.8 to 2.9,
Horizontal angle 6.6° to 65°

450 TV lines (PCS-C1P)
Pan/tilt action
Dimension
Mass

Horizontal ±100°
Vertical ±25°
147 × 130 × 138 mm (w/h/d) (5 7/8
× 5 1/8 × 5 1/2 inches) (not
including the projected parts)
Approx. 1.1 kg (2 lb 7 oz)

Microphone
Frequency range
18 kHz
Directional characteristic
Narrow-angle directional

PCS-R1 Remote Commander
Signal format
Control
Dimensions
Mass

Infrared SIRCS
DC 3V using two size AA (R6)
batteries
50 × 24 × 197 mm (w/h/d) (2 ×
31
/32 × 7 7/8 inches) (not including
the projected parts)
Approx. 140 g (4 oz) (including
batteries)

PCS-AC195 AC Adaptor
Power requirements
100 to 240V AC, 50/60 Hz, 1.3 A
to 0.6 A
Output
19.5 V, 4.1A
Operating temperature
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 63 × 31 × 140 mm (w/h/d) (2 1/2 ×
1 1/4 × 5 5/8 inches)
Mass
Approx. 410 g (14 oz)

PCS-A1 Microphone
(Optional)

Focal distance
100 (WIDE) to 600 (TELE) mm
Minimum illumination
3.5 lux at F 1.8/50 IRE
Illumination range
3.5 lux to 100 000 lux
Horizontal resolution
470 TV lines (PCS-C1)

Bandwidth
13 kHz
Directional characteristic
Omnidirectional
Dimensions 74 ×16 × 93 mm (w/h/d)
(3 × 21/32 × 3 3/4 inches)
Mass
Approx. 170 g (6 oz)
Power
Plug in power
Specifications

217

Appendix

Operating temperature
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 258 × 54 × 171 mm (w/h/d)
(10 1/4 × 2 1/4 × 6 3/4 inches) (not
including the projected parts)
Mass
Approx. 1.3 kg (2 lb 14 oz)
Supplied accessories
Remote Commander PCS-R1 (1)
Size AA (R6) batteries for Remote
Commander (2)
IR repeater (2)
Camera cable (0.25 m, 0.8 ft) (1)
S-video connecting cable (1.5 m,
4.9 ft) (1)
Audio connecting cable (1 m, 3.3
ft) (1)
AC adaptor PCS-AC195 (1)
Power cord (1)
21-pin adaptor (1) (PCS-P1P only)
Velcro (3 for the Camera Unit, 2
for the Communication
Terminal)
CD-ROM (1)
Operation guide (1)
Warranty booklet (1)

PCS-A300 Microphone
(Optional)
Bandwidth
13 kHz
Directional characteristic
Unidirectional
Dimension
68 × 16 × 96 mm (w/h/d) (2 3/4 ×
21
/32 × 3 7/8 inches)
Mass
Approx. 200 g (7 oz)
Power
Plug in power

PCS-B384 ISDN Unit
(Optional)
Power requirements
19.5 V
Power consumption
0.3 A
Operating temperature
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 165 × 34 × 127 mm (w/h/d) (6 1/2 ×
1 3/8 × 5 inches) (not including
the projected parts)
Mass
Approx. 400 g (14 oz)
Supplied accessories
Interface cable (5 m, 16.4 ft) (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Warranty booklet (1)

PCS-B768 ISDN Unit
(Optional)
Power requirements
19.5 V
Power consumption
0.5 A
Operating temperature
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 165 × 34 × 127 mm (w/h/d) (6 1/2 ×
1 3/8 × 5 inches) (not including
the projected parts)
Mass
Approx. 400 g (14 oz)

218

Specifications

Supplied accessories
Interface cable (5 m, 16.4 ft) (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Warranty booklet (1)

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box
(Optional)
Power requirements
19.5 V
Power consumption
1.0 A
Operating temperature
5°C to 35°C (41°F to 94°F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 240 × 33 × 160 mm (w/h/d) (9 1/2 ×
1 5/16 × 6 3/8 inches) (not
including the projected parts)
Mass
Approx. 850 g (1 lb 14 oz)
Supplied accessories
Interface cable (8 m, 26.2 ft) (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Warranty booklet (1)

PCS-320M1 H.320 MCU
Software (Optional)
Dimensions

50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm (w/h/d) (2 ×
1
/8 × 7/8 inches)
Mass
Approx. 4 g (0.1 oz)
Supplied accessories
Serial Number seal (1)
Operating Instructions (1)

PCS-323M1 H.323 MCU
Software (Optional)
Dimensions

50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm (w/h/d) (2 ×
1/8 × 7/8 inches)
Mass
Approx. 4 g (0.1 oz)
Supplied accessories
Serial Number seal (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.

Acceptable RGB Input/Output Signals
PCS-P1/P1P Communication Terminal (RGB OUT)
Picture element Signal format
1024 × 768

fH (kHz)

XGA VESA 60 Hz

fV (Hz)

48.363

Dot clock
(MHz)

60.004

Sync

65 H-neg V-neg

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box (RGB IN A/RGB IN B)
Picture
element

Signal format

640 × 480

VGA mode
Macintosh 13”

1024 × 768

fV (Hz)

31.469

Dot clock
(MHz)

Sync

59.94

25.17 H-neg

V-neg

35

66.667

30.24 H-neg

V-neg

VGA VESA
72 Hz

37.861

72.809

31.5 H-neg

V-neg

VGA VESA
75 Hz

37.5

75

31.5 H-neg

V-neg

VGA VESA
85 Hz

43.269

85.008

36 H-neg

V-neg

SVGA VESA
56 Hz

35.156

56.25

36 H-pos

V-pos

SVGA VESA
60 Hz

37.879

60.317

40 H-pos

V-pos

SVGA VESA
72 Hz

48.077

72.188

50 H-pos

V-pos

SVGA VESA
75 Hz

46.875

75

49.5 H-pos

V-pos

SVGA VESA
85 Hz

53.674

85.061

56.25 H-pos

V-pos

XGA VESA
60 Hz

48.363

60.004

65 H-neg

V-neg

XGA VESA
70 Hz

56.476

70.069

75 H-neg

V-neg

XGA VESA
75 Hz

60.023

75.029

78.75 H-pos

V-pos

Specifications

Appendix

800 × 600

fH (kHz)

219

PCS-DSB1 Data Solution Box (RGB OUT)
Picture element Signal format
1024 × 768

XGA VESA 60 Hz

fH (kHz)
48.363

fV (Hz)
60.004

Dot clock
(MHz)

Sync

65 H-neg V-neg

• While the picture input from the RGB IN A or RGB IN B connector is transmitted,
the picture of the input signal format (VGA, SVGA or XGA) is output from this
connector.

220

Specifications

Pin Assignment

Pin

Signal

Description

14

GND

Ground

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T jack
1

8

VIDEO OUT MONITOR MAIN/SUB,
VIDEO IN AUX 1/AUX 2 connectors
4
2

Modular jack
Signal

Description

1

TPOP

Transmit+

2

TPON

Transmit–

3

TPIP

Receive+

4

NC

—

5

NC

—

6

TPIN

Receive–

7

NC

—

8

NC

—

Mini-DIN 4-pin connector
Pin

Signal

Description

1

GND

Analog Ground

2

GND

Analog Ground

3

Y

Brightness Signal

4

C

Chrominance Signal

Appendix

Pin

3
1

CAMERA UNIT connector

ISDN UNIT connector
2

14

1

13

14-pin connector

8

1

15

9

D-sub 15-pin connector (female)
Pin

Signal

Description

1

Y

Brightness signal

2

Y.GND

Brightness signal ground

Pin

Signal

Description

3

C

Chrominance signal

1

GND

Ground

4

C.GND

2

19.5V

19.5V

Chrominance signal
ground

3

DCLK+

Clock+

5

Video

Video signal

4

DCLK–

Clock–

6

Video.GND Video signal Ground

5

DR+

Receive data+

7

TXD

Transmit data

8

RXD

Receive data

9

19.5 V

19.5 V

10

MIC+

Microphone+

11

MIC–

Microphone–

12

SIRCS

Remote control data

13

DTR

Data terminal ready

14

STANDBY Standby

15

GND

6

DR–

Receive data–

7

FS+

Frame sync+

8

FS–

Frame sync–

9

DX+

Transmit data+

10

DX–

Transmit data–

11

RX

Serial receive data

12

TX

Serial transmit data

13

19.5V

19.5V

Ground

Specifications

221

TERMINAL connector
8

Pin
1

15

9

D-sub 15-pin connector (female)

Signal

Description

9

19.5V

19.5V

10

NC

–

11

AGND

Analog ground

12

NC

–

13

RD+

Transmit data+

Pin

Signal

Description

1

Y

Brightness signal

2

Y.GND

Brightness signal ground

3

C

Chrominance signal

4

C.GND

Chrominance signal
ground

5

Video

Video signal

6

Video.GN
D

Video signal Ground

7

RXD

Receive data

8

TXD

Transmit data

Pin

Signal

Description

RED

R (red)

14

RD–

Transmit data–

15

GND

Ground

RGB OUT connector
5

1

10

6

15

11

Mini D-sub 15-pin (female)

9

19.5 V

19.5 V

1

10

MIC+

Microphone+

2

GREEN

G (green)

11

MIC–

Microphone–

3

BLUE

B (blue)

NC

–

GND

Ground
R (red) signal ground

12

SIRCS

Remote control data

4

13

DTR

Data terminal ready

5

14

STANDBY Standby

6

RED.GND

GND

7

GREEN.GND G (green) signal
ground

8

BLUE.GND

B (blue) signal
ground

9

NC

–

15

Ground

DSB connector
1

8

9

15

D-sub 15-pin (male)
Pin

Signal

Description

1

Video

Video signal

2

Video.GND

Video signal ground

3

LINE A+

Line audio+

4

LINE A–

Line audio–

5

MIC+

Microphone+

6

MIC–

Microphone–

7

TD+

Receive+

8

TD–

Receive–

222

Specifications

10

SYNC.GND

Sync signal ground

11

NC

–

12

NC

–

13

HSYNC

Horizontal sync

14

VSYNC

Vertical sync

15

NC

–

Pin Assignment on Optional
Board Connectors
ISDN 1-3 jacks (PCS-B384)
ISDN 1-6 jacks (PCS-B768)
1

Pin Signal

Description

12

RX

Serial receive data

13

19.5V

19.5V

14

GND

Ground

8

TERMINAL connector (PCS-DSB1)

Modular jack
Signal

Description

1

NC

–

2

NC

–

3

TA

Transmit+

4

RA

Receive+

5

RB

Receive–

6

TB

Transmit–

7

NC

–

8

NC

–

TERMINAL connector (PCS-B384/
PCS-B768)
2
1

14
13

USB connector

8

9

15

D-sub 15-pin connector (male)
Pin

Signal

Description

1

Video

Video signal

2

Video.GND

Video signal ground

3

LINE A+

Line audio+

4

LINE A–

Line audio–

5

MIC+

Microphone+

6

MIC–

Microphone–

7

RD+

Receive+

8

RD–

Receive–

9

19.5V

19.5V

10

NC

–

11

AGND

Analog ground

12

NC

–

13

TD+

Transmit data+

Pin Signal

Description

14

TD–

Transmit data–

1

GND

Chassis ground

15

GND

Ground

2

19.5V

19.5V

3

DCLK+

Clock+

4

DCLK–

Clock–

5

DR+

Transmit data+

6

DR–

Transmit data–

7

FS+

Frame sync+

8

FS–

Frame sync–

9

DX+

Receive data+

10

DX–

Receive data–

11

TX

Serial transmit data

Specifications

Appendix

Pin

1

223

List of Port Numbers Used on
the PCS-1/1P
When connecting one-to-one
(Default)
When “Port Number Used” is set to
“Default” in the LAN Setup menu, the PCS1/1P uses the following port numbers.

Signal

Port number

RAS (PCS-1/1P)

Any number from 3000
to 3002 (using
GateKeeper)

RAS
(GateKeeper)

1718 or 1719 (using
GateKeeper)

Q.931 (dial)

Any number from 3000
to 3002

Signal

Port number

Q.931 (answer)

1720

RAS (PCS-1/1P)

Any number from 2253
to 2255 (using
GateKeeper)

H.245

Any number from 3000
to 3002

Audio RTP

3100

RAS
(GateKeeper)

1718 or 1719 (using
GateKeeper)

Audio RTCP

3101

Video RTP

3102

Q.931 (dial)

Any number from 2253
to 2255

Video RTCP

3103

Q.931 (answer)

1720

FECC RTP

3104

H.245

Any number from 2253
to 2255

FECC RTCP

3105

Data conference
RTP

3106

Data conference
RTCP

3107

Audio RTP

49152

Audio RTCP

49153

Video RTP

49154

Video RTCP

49155

FECC RTP

49156

FECC RTCP

49157

Data conference
RTP

49158

Data conference
RTCP

49159

When connecting one-to-one
(Custom: TCP Port Number 3000
and UDP Port Number 3000)
When “Port Number Used” is set to
“Custom” in the LAN Setup menu, the PCS1/1P uses the port numbers defined by the
values entered in “TCP Port Number” and
“UDP Port Number”.
For example, when “TCP Port Number” is
set to “3000” and “UDP Port Number” is set
to “3100”, the PCS-1/1P uses the following
port numbers.

224

Specifications

When the H.323 MCU software is
installed (Default)
When “Port Number Used” is set to
“Default” in the LAN Setup menu, the PCS1/1P operated as the main terminal uses the
following port numbers.
Signal

Port number Port number
(First point) (Nth point)

RAS (PCS-1/
1P)

Any number from 2253 to
2263 (using Gate
Keeper)

RAS (Gate
Keeper)

1718 or 1719 (using Gate
Keeper)

Q.931 (dial)

Any number from 2253 to
2263

Q.931 (answer)

1720

H.245

Any number from 2253 to
2263

Audio RTP

49152

49152+20 ×
(N-1)

Signal

Port number Port number
(First point) (Nth point)

Audio RTCP

49153

Video RTP
Video RTCP
FECC RTP
FECC RTCP

49154
49155
49156
49157

49153+20 ×
(N-1)

Port
Port number
number
(Nth point)
(First point)

Audio RTCP

3101

49154+20 ×
(N-1)

3101+20 ×
(N-1)

Video RTP

3102

49155+20 ×
(N-1)

3102+20 ×
(N-1)

Video RTCP

3103

49156+20 ×
(N-1)

3103+20 ×
(N-1)

FECC RTP

3104

49157+20 ×
(N-1)

3104+20 ×
(N-1)

FECC RTCP

3105

3105+20 ×
(N-1)

Data conference 3106
RTP

3106+20 ×
(N-1)

Data conference 3107
RTCP

3107+20 ×
(N-1)

Data conference 49158
RTP

49158+20 ×
(N-1)

Data conference 49159
RTCP

49159+20 ×
(N-1)

When the H.323 MCU software is
installed (Custom: TCP Port
Number 3000 and UDP Port Number
3000)
When “Port Number Used” is set to
“Custom” in the LAN Setup menu, the PCS1/1P uses the port numbers defined by the
values entered in “TCP Port Number” and
“UDP Port Number”.
For example, when “TCP Port Number” is
set to “3000” and “UDP Port Number” is set
to “3100”, the PCS-1/1P operated as the
main terminal uses the following port
numbers.
Signal

Port
Port number
number
(Nth point)
(First point)

RAS (PCS-1/
1P)

Any number from 3000 to
3010 (using Gate
Keeper)

RAS
(GateKeeper)

1718 or 1719 (using Gate
Keeper)

Q.931 (dial)

Any number from 3000 to
3010

Q.931 (answer)

1720

H.245

Any number from 3000 to
3010

Audio RTP

3100

3100+20 ×
(N-1)
Specifications

225

Appendix

Signal

Videoconferencing
Room Layout

Side view (vertical range at
maximum zoom-out)

Be sure to position camera and microphone
appropriately in your videoconferencing
room.

Camera Range

25˚

represents the shooting area of the
camera when the zoom has been extended
fully.
indicates the shooting area of
the camera when the left/right angling
function is fully utilized. Use the
measurements below as a guide for the
layout of your videoconference room.

3.1 m
(8.41 ft)

42˚
25˚

4 m (13.12 ft)

Layout Considerations

1.5 m
(4.92 ft)

Top view (horizontal range at
maximum zoom-out)

100˚

100˚
4m
(13.12 ft)

65˚

5.1 m (16.73 ft)

• Avoid having large, moving objects,
especially people, behind the participants,
as the quality of the picture transmitted to
the remote party will deteriorate.
• Do not seat participants in front of a wall
with fine stripe patterns.
• Choose a room where echo will not occur.
• Do not install the system near noise
sources such as air conditioners or copy
machines.
• Avoid placing the system in a room where
there are the speakers used for an in-house
broadcasting system.

Lighting Considerations
Do not point the camera toward a window
where sunlight comes in as back lighting
may decrease the contrast. If it is necessary,
cover the window with a thick curtain.

226

Videoconferencing Room Layout

Installing the Communication
Terminal and Camera
You can fix the Communication Terminal or
the Camera to your chosen place of
installation using the supplied Velcro.

1

Stick the supplied Velcro to the
bottom of the Communication
Terminal or Camera.

Adjust room lighting so that it falls on the
participants. Avoid direct light on the TV
monitor. Light intensity on faces should be
about 300 lux or more.

3

3

3

Appendix

3

Bottom of the Communication
Terminal

If an inverter type or brightness-adjustable
type of fluorescent lamp is used, the
sensitivity of the Remote Commander may
deteriorate.

Bottom of the Camera Unit

2

Stick another piece of Velcro to the
installation place.

3

Install the Communication Terminal
or the Camera on the installation place
by securing the two pieces of Velcro.

Videoconferencing Room Layout

227

Glossary
BONDING*
BONDING is one of the Inverse
Multiplexing methods allowing connection
of the videoconferencing system using
multiple ISDN lines. Dialing the first ISDN
line only enables you to connect all other
lines. Dialing the second and later lines is
automatically done by the communication
between the videoconferencing systems on
both sites. To use BONDING, it is required
that both videoconferencing systems are
equipped with the BONDING function and
that “Area Code” and “Local Number” in the
ISDN Setup menu on the answering site are
set correctly. As the communication
between the systems when using the
BONDING function is made via the ISDN
numbers on the answering site, setting of
“Area Code” and “Local Number” in the
ISDN Setup menu is not essential on the
dialing site.
* BONDING (Bandwidth on Demand
Interoperability Group) is a registered
trademark of THE BONDING
CONSORTIUM.

BRI
An abbreviation for Basic Rate Interface.
Basic interface standardized by the ITU-T.
Single ISDN has two B channels and one D
channel.
CIF
An abbreviation for Common Intermediate
Format. This format allows communication
between different color systems (NTSC and
PAL).
352 pixels × 288 lines
Codec
An abbreviation for Coder-Decoder. An
integrated device of a coder that converts an
analog audio/video signal to a digital data
stream and compresses it, and a decoder for
expanding to restore the original analog
signal.

228

Glossary

DHCP
An abbreviation for Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol. Manages IP
addresses in the network.
DNS
An abbreviation for Domain Name System.
Defines the domain name system.
Echo Canceler
Device to eliminate echo that occurs when
transmitting audio.
Frame rate
The number of frames which can be
encoded/decoded in one second.
G.711
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 64 Kbps. It
can be transmitted with a data rate of 56
Kbps.
G.722
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A 7-kHz
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 48 Kbps, 56
Kbps or 64 Kbps.
G.722.1
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A 7-kHz
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 24Kbps or
32 Kbps.
G.729
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with the data rate of 8 Kbps.
G.723.1
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 5.3 Kbps or
6.3 Kbps.

G.728
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 16 Kbps.
Gatekeeper
Controls the access of H.323
videoconference devices on a network.
Administers the zone, access limitation,
audio/video bandwidth, and alias etc.
H.221
Frame structure for a 64 to 1920 Kbps
channel in audiovisual teleservices.

H.261
Video codec for audio/visual services as p ×
64 Kbps. Videoconferencing standard that
defines a video coding algorithm, picture
format and error correcting technology for
communication between different
manufacturers’ video codecs.
H.263
A video coding algorithm based on the
H.261 standard. This format enables
communication via a lower bit rate.
H.263+
Video encoding/decoding format based on
the H.263 standard, added by the Annex I to
T (I, J, K …… T), that allows enhanced
picture quality and error resistance.
Normally, this format is a profile used with
a combination of some of the Annex for
H.263/H.263+.
H.264
A video coding algorithm newly
standardized by the ITU-T in May 2003.
This format realizes high-quality picture via
a lower bit rate. It provides an equal picture
quality via half as low bit rate as the H.263
format. The H.264 format is also called as
MPEG4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC).

H.323
This enables communications on the nonQOS (Quality of Service) LAN.
HMLP
See “MLP”.
I-MUX
An abbreviation for Inverse Multiplexer.
This protocol allows you to transmit the data
at 384 Kbps via 6B-channel.
Interlaced SIF
With TV pictures, 60 fields of pictures per
second are interlaced to provide high
resolution and smooth motion pictures.
The conventional videoconferencing system
uses CIF format pictures (352 pixel × 388
line) transmitted in 30 fields per second. In
CIF format, smooth motion pictures like TV
pictures cannot be obtained. In the Interlaced
SIF format, interlaced SIF size pictures (352
pixel × 240 line) can be transmitted at 60
frames per second. This enables display of
pictures with higher vertical resolution of
352 pixel × 480 lines, providing smooth
motion picture. However, a relatively higher
bit rate is required as the amount of
information is twice as much as that of the
CIF format.
ISDN
An abbreviation for Integrated Services
Digital Network. This is a communication
protocol by CCITT on transmission of
integrated voice, video, and data.
Bandwidths include basic (64 Kbps) and
primary rate (1.544 and 2.048 Mbps).
ITU-T
An abbreviation for International
Telecommunication Union,
Telecommunications.

Glossary

229

Appendix

H.239
ITU-T standard for sharing data and
presentations with video. This supports the
dual video presentation mode, enabling
endpoints to receive and transmit video and
presentation data simultaneously.

H.320
A videoconferencing standard for
communication between different
videoconferencing system.

Lip synchronization
A function that synchronizes sound with
motion. Sound processing is much faster
than motion processing, thus sound and
motion sometimes get out of step with each
other.
MCU
An abbreviation for Multipoint Control
Unit. When connecting a MCU, a multipoint
videoconference can be held.
MLP
Data communication is also available during
communication of video/audio signals
between the videoconferencing systems.
The MLP or HMLP is a protocol for data
communication such as NetMeeting. Using
the HMLP protocol allows faster data
transmission.
MPEG4
A video coding algorithm recommended by
the ISO/IEC based on the H.263+ standard.
Adding some tools provides some
improvement of picture quality compared
with the H.263+ standard. The MPEG4
format is commonly used for personal
computers, cellular phones, etc.
P in P
An abbreviation for “Picture in Picture.”
This is a function which allows you to
monitor your own party on a small window
on your TV monitor.
QCIF
An abbreviation for Quater CIF. The number
of pixels is a quarter than one of CIF format.
176 pixels × 144 lines
Secondary terminal
Normally, a multipoint videoconference is
not available unless the video and audio
modes and transmission rate of the
videoconferencing systems of all the sites
are the same.*1 For a multipoint
videoconference the terminal that can be
connected in the same modes is called a
primary terminal, while a secondary
terminal is the terminal in which some of the
functions are restricted since the connection
is not enabled with the same modes. The

230

Glossary

restriction on the functions depends on the
conditions described in “Notes on
Secondary Terminals” under “Chapter 8
Multipoint Videoconference”.
For example, this system does not transmit
video signals to a terminal that has no
common formats but can communicate via
audio signals. In this case, the terminal in
which picture viewing is not available is
regarded as a secondary terminal.*2 A
terminal communicated via a normal phone
included in the multipoint videoconference
is also called a secondary terminal. For
details on secondary terminals, see “Notes
on Secondary Terminals” on page 179.
*1 Difference between the NTSC and PAL
color systems is permitted.
*2 Receiving the video signals from this
terminal may be available with the system.

SNMP
An abbreviation for Simple Network
Management Protocol. This protocol is for
management information between the
management station and the managed
terminals.
SPID
An abbreviation for Service Profile ID.
Sub-address
An identification number given to devices
sharing a common ISDN line .
TOS
Inputting the information data in the TOS
field of the IP address allows the
communication system to judge the packet
transmission priority, etc. It also enables
change of path according to the types of
service (Delay or Size).

Menu Configuration
The menus of the camera are configured as described below.
For detaformation, see pages in parentheses. The initial settings of each item
are bolded.
Launcher

Phone Book

(page 70)

(page 63)

List Edit

Index
IP
A
Line I/F
Number of Lines
LAN Bandwidth

Dial

(page 74)

IP
A
Line I/F
Number of Lines
LAN Bandwidth

Menu

Still Image

(page 106)

Camera

(page 89)

IP, ISDN, ISDN(2B), ISDN (Telephone),
IP ,
ISDN,
IP&ISDN, SIP
1B(64K), 2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K), 12B(768K)
64Kbps, 128Kbps, 256Kbps
384Kbps, 512Kbps, 768Kbps,
1024Kbps, 1920Kbps,
Other (1–1920Kbps)

Send, Clear
Receive, Clear
Continuous Send, Stop
Save
Send Object
Preset Save
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Preset Load
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Adjustments
Angle, Zoom, Focus,
Brightness, Backlight

Memory Stick (page 99)
Setup
Video/Audio

(page 73)
Multipoint Mode
Setup (Administrator)

Sound Priority, Picture Priority,
Motion Priority, More Options
On, Auto
Dial Setup
Answer Setup
Multipoint Setup
Audio Setup
General Setup
Administrator Setup
ISDN Setup
LAN Setup
Machine Information
Status
Encryption via LAN
SIP Setup

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L

Menu Configuration

231

Appendix

Auto Dial
Dial

IP, ISDN, ISDN (Telephone),
IP, ISDN, IP&ISDN, SIP
1B(64K), 2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K), 12B(768K)
64Kbps, 128Kbps, 256Kbps,
384Kbps, 512Kbps, 768Kbps,
1024Kbps, 1920Kbps,
Other (1–1920Kbps)
On, Off

A Dial Setup

Page: 1/4

(page 40)

Line I/F
Bonding
Number of Lines
LAN Bandwidth

Prefix
Restrict

B Answer Setup

Auto, 56K

Page: 2/4

ALL, Interlaced SIF, H.264, MPEG4, H.263+,
H.261, No Video
Video Frame
15fps, 30fps
Audio Mode
ALL, MPEG4 Audio,
G.722.1, G.722, G.729, G.728, G.723.1, G.711
Far End Camera Control On, Off
T.120 Data
On, Off
H.239
On, Off

Page: 3/4

Prefix-A
Prefix-B
Prefix-C

Page: 4/4

Telephone Mode
More Options Enable
User Name Input

Auto, G.711µ-law, G.711A-law
On, Off
On, Off

Page: 1/2

Auto Answer
Number of Lines

Auto Answer, Off
1B(64K), 2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K), 12B(768K)
Auto, 56K
64Kbps, 128Kbps, 256Kbps, 384Kbps,
512Kbps, 768Kbps, 1024Kbps, 1920Kbps,
Other (1–1920Kbps)
On, Off
On, Off

(page 43)

Video Mode

Restrict
LAN Bandwidth

ISDN MSN
Mic on Answer
Page: 2/2

232

IP, ISDN, ISDN (Telephone), SIP
Auto, On
1B(64K), 2B(128K), 3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K), 8B(512K), 12B(768K)
64Kbps, 128Kbps, 256Kbps, 384Kbps,
512Kbps, 768Kbps, 1024Kbps, 1920Kbps,
Other (1–1920Kbps)
Prefix-None, Prefix-A,
Prefix-B, Prefix-C

Menu Configuration

Video Mode

ALL, Interlaced SIF, H.264, MPEG4,
H.263+, H.261, No Video
Video Frame
15fps, 30fps
Audio Mode
ALL, MPEG4 Audio, G.722.1, G.722, G.729,
G.728, G.723.1, G.711
Far End Camera Control On, Off
T.120 Data
On, Off
H.239
On, Off

C Multipoint
Setup

Page: 1/2

(page 57)

Page: 2/2

D Audio Setup

Page: 1/2

Page: 2/2

Restrict

On, Auto
Split, Voice Activate
1B(64K), 2B(128K), 4B(256K), 6B(384K)
384Kbps, 512Kbps, 768Kbps, 1024Kbps,
1920Kbps, Other (1–1920Kbps)
Auto, 56K

Video Mode
Audio Mode
Display Terminal Name
Far End Camera Control
Reject Answer

ALL, H.263, H.261, No Video
ALL, G.722, G.728, G.711
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off

Input Select
Mic Select
CTE
Echo Canceler
Lip Sync
Recording Mute
Beep Sound
Sound Effect
Dial Tone
Ringer Tone

MIC, AUX, MIC + AUX
Internal, External, DSB MIC
Off, AUX, DSB AUX IN
Internal, External, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off

Menu Configuration

Appendix

(page 48)

Multipoint Mode
Broadcast Mode
Number of Lines
Total LAN Bandwidth

233

E General Setup

(page 45)

Page: 1/4

Page: 2/4

Page: 3/4

Terminal Name
Dual Monitor
Monitor Out/
Sub Monitor Out
Standby Mode
Standby Time
Time Display
Clock Set
Last Number Registration
T.120 PC Address
Whiteboard Attachment
Whiteboard Size
Whiteboard Size
Measurement
Language

IR Repeater Mode

Page: 4/4

F Administrator Setup

Character Input Help
Control by Far End
Memory Stick Format
Custom Input Label

On, Off
1–99 minutes
On, Off

On, Off
Vertical, Horizontal
2'0"×3'0", 3'0"×4'0", 4'0"×6'0", 4'0"×8'0"
3'0"×2'0",4'0"×3'0", 6'0"×4'0", 8'0"×4'0"
inches, Meters
English, French, German, Japanese,
Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese,
PORT(Portuguese), Traditional Chinese,
Korean, Dutch, Swedish, Danish,
Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic
MODE1, MODE2, MODE3,
MODE4
On, Off
On, Off
Main
Object
AUX1
AUX2

Page: 1/2

Administrator Password
Superuser Password
Remote Access Password
Web Monitor
On, Off
Web Access
Disabled, Enabled

Page: 2/2

Save Phone Book
Load Phone Book
Auto Dialing
On, Off
Create Private Phone Book
Delete Private Phone Book
Copy to Private Phone Book

(page 53)

234

On, Off
VIDEO OUT, RGB OUT, RGB OUT (DSB)

Menu Configuration

G ISDN Setup

Page: 1/7

Country/Region

(page 54)
Country/Region Code
Protocol

Europe (excluding France),
France, Japan, USA, China, Other
Japan NTT, Euro ISDN, Euro
ISDN (France), National ISDN,
5ESS (P-MP), 5ESS (P-P), DMS-100

Area Code–Local Number A1–C2

Page: 3/7

Area Code–Local Number D1–F2

Page: 4/7

Sub Address A1–C2

Page: 5/7

Sub Address D1–F2

Page: 6/7

SPID A1–C2*

Page: 7/7

SPID D1–F2*

Appendix

Page: 2/7

* Displayed only when “USA” is selected in “Country/Region”.

Menu Configuration

235

H LAN Setup

Page: 1/8

DHCP Mode
Host Name
IP Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
DNS Address

Auto, Off

Page: 2/8

Gatekeeper Mode
Gatekeeper Address
User Alias
User Number

Auto, On, Off

Page: 3/8

SNMP Mode
Trap Destination
Community
Description
Location
Contact

On, Off

Page: 4/8

NAT Mode
NAT Address
Packet Resend Request
Adaptive Rate Control
LAN Mode

On, Off

(page 50)

236

On, Off
On, Off
Auto Negotiation,100Mbps Full Duplex,
100Mbps Half Duplex, 10Mbps Full Duplex,
10Mbps Half Duplex

Page: 5/8

Port Number Used
TCP Port Number
UDP Port Number

Custom, Default

Page: 6/8

TOS
IP Precedence
Low Delay
High Throughput
High Reliability
Minimum Cost
Diffserve

Off, IP Precedence, Diffserve

Page: 7/8

PPPoE
PPPoE User Name
PPPoE Password

On, Off

Page: 8/8

Fixed IP for PPPoE
On, Off
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE
PPPoE DNS
Specify, Obtain automatically
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS

Menu Configuration

On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off

I Machine Information

(page 59)

Host Version
ISDN UNIT Version
DSB Version
DSP Version
Software Option

Option I/F

None, Multipoint (H.323),
Multipoint (H.320),
Multipoint (H.320 + H.323)
SIP
Multipoint (H.323), SIP
Multipoint (H.320), SIP
Multipoint (H.320 + H.323), SIP
None, ISDN UNIT, DSB,
Whiteboard

Host Name
IP Address
MAC Address
Serial Number

Appendix

Menu Configuration

237

J Status

Communication Status

Connection A*

(page 60)

(Encode)
(Decode)

ISDN Line Status
LAN Line Status
LAN Connection Status

...

...
Connection E*

Audio Mode
Video Mode
Frame Rate
Rate
MLP Rate
HMLP Rate
LSD Rate
Line I/F
Camera Control
Data Control
DSB
Whiteboard

(Encode)
(Decode)

Status**
Cause Code
Status**
Cause Code
Send
/Receive

Audio Mode
Video Mode
Frame Rate
Rate
MLP Rate
HMLP Rate
LSD Rate
Line I/F
Camera Control
Data Control
DSB
Whiteboard

Audio Bit Rate
Video Bit Rate

Receive Packet Loss
Audio Data
Video Data
Camera Control Data
Packet Recover Ratio

* During a multipoint videoconference Connection A to E with the
terminal name appear according to the points connected.
** While not in communication only these items are displayed.

K Encryption via LAN

Encryption via LAN

(page 61)
Encryption Password

238

Menu Configuration

On, Off

L SIP Setup

Page: 1/3

SIP Server Mode
Proxy Server Address
Registrar Address
SIP Domain

Page: 2/3

Registered User Name 1-3
Password 1-3

Page: 3/3

Registered User Name 4, 5
Password 4, 5

(page 62)

On, Off

Appendix

Menu Configuration

239

Sony Corporation



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Modify Date                     : 2004:11:24 16:42:44+09:00
Create Date                     : 2004:11:24 10:16:18Z
Page Count                      : 240
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
About                           : uuid:583c5c6a-4694-4b0d-b893-4d070649aea2
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)
Mod Date                        : 2004:11:24 16:42:44+09:00
Creation Date                   : 2004:11:24 10:16:18Z
Author                          : Sony Corporation
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Metadata Date                   : 2004:11:24 16:42:44+09:00
Document ID                     : uuid:7caa24ae-0a50-41fb-8450-6cca37e5fd8b
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : PCS-1/1P
Creator                         : Sony Corporation
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu